JP7214439B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine capable of playing games.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is shot into a game area by a shooting device, and when the game ball wins a prize in a prize winning area such as a prize winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined winning value is given to the player. There is something configured in Further, a variable display means is provided that can variably display (also referred to as "variation") the identification information, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display means is a specific display result, a predetermined game value is displayed. (so-called pachinko machines).

The winning value means paying out prize balls or awarding points or prizes according to the winning of game balls in the winning area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win the hit ball, or It is to generate a right to be in an advantageous state, or to be in a state in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be established.

In the pachinko machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started by the variable display means based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole. If it is, a "jackpot (advantageous state)" occurs. It should be noted that the derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big win occurs, for example, the big win opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big win game state in which the ball is likely to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning opening is closed. The number of openings of the big winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning slot may be called a round.

In such a game machine, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel, and the special state is controlled to the special state more frequently than the non-special state. Some are configured to be controllable. For example, Patent Document 2 describes that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can fluctuate in parallel and shift to a fireworks rush (high-probability non-time reduction state). Further, it is described that even if the same jackpot pattern is won, there may or may not be a transition to a fireworks rush depending on the state at the time of winning. For example, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal mode and the 9-round symbol 2 or the 16-round symbol is won, the 9-round big win game or the 16-round big win game is run, and the fireworks rush is started. When the second special symbol lottery is executed in the mode and the 9-round symbol 2 or the 16-round symbol is won, the 9-round big win game or 16-round big win game is executed, and the transition to the special normal mode is described. .

JP 2017-176585 A (paragraphs 0057, 0334, 0572, 0574)

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, there are cases where control is in a special state and there are cases where it is not controlled when it is controlled in an advantageous state. It is likely to decline.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest in a game when configured to be controllable to a special state.

(Means A) A game machine that includes operation means that can be operated by a player, performs variable display of effect identification information, and can be controlled in an advantageous state,
specific identification information variable display means capable of variably displaying specific identification information corresponding to the variable display of the production identification information;
game state control means capable of controlling a plurality of game states;
a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect that temporarily makes the effect identification information invisible while not making the specific identification information invisible when the game state is switched,
The special production execution means is
As the special effect , the plurality of non-separated specific images based on still image data are displayed without displaying the plurality of separated specific images based on moving image data gradually joining together. After displaying the identification information in front and executing a pseudo-closed effect in which all the front sides of the effect identification information are made invisible, the plurality of specific images are separated to open so that all the front sides of the effect identification information can be visually recognized. While performing the production,
A plurality of types of the plurality of specific images can be displayed,
displaying the plurality of specific images of different types in accordance with the gaming state when controlled to the advantageous state;
When the special effect execution means executes the pseudo-close effect, outputting a sound effect such that the plurality of specific images are combined,
When the special effect executing means executes the pseudo closing effect, the operation means image can be vibrated vertically.
It is characterized by
Furthermore, (means 1) the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a gaming state control means capable of controlling a plurality of gaming states (for example, step 080IWS2205 in the game control microcomputer 100). ~ S2207, S2210 ~ S2219, S2222 ~ S2225, S2227 execution part) and when the game state is switched (for example, when an irregular jackpot occurs, the 50th variation display in the low probability / high base state When executing), a special effect execution means (for example, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a special effect (for example, a shutter effect) that makes the predetermined display (for example, the decorative pattern on the left, middle, and right) once invisible Step 080 IWS503, S505, S506, S508, S512), and the special effect execution means generates a specific image (for example, FIGS. 9-43 (B) and 9-44 (A)) as a special effect. (still image with the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 closed shown in Fig. 1)) is displayed to execute a pseudo-close effect to make the predetermined display difficult to see, and then the specific image is separated and the predetermined display becomes visible. 9-43 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 9-44 (B) and (C), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 gradually open moving images) are executed and a plurality of Types of specific images (for example, static images shown in FIGS. 9-46 (A) to (C)) can be displayed, and different types of specific images are displayed according to the game state when controlled to be in an advantageous state. (For example, when the shutter performance is executed in the 50th variation display in the low probability/high base state, the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 is displayed, and if an irregular jackpot occurs when the game state is in the low probability/low base state (normal state) or in the low probability/high base state, the display shown in FIG. 9-46 (B) As shown, the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including the characters "Intense Heat Standby" are displayed, and when an irregular jackpot occurs when the game state is a high probability/low base state (second KT state) , upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including numbers are displayed as shown in FIG. 9-46(C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to smoothly hide the predetermined display and switch the display with a simple display in the special effect.

(Means 2) In means 1, variable display execution capable of executing variable display of first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (eg, second special symbol) in parallel Means (for example, the part that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100) and advantageous state control means (for example, game control A part that executes steps S122 to S125 in the microcomputer 100) and a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 for step S126 ~ Part that executes S128) and special state control means (for example, step in game control microcomputer 100 for special state (for example, KT state) that is more frequently controlled to special state than non-special state 080IWS2205 to S2207, S2210 to S2219, S2222 to S2225, and S2227), and the special state control means includes, as special states, a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and the first special state It is possible to control to a second special state (for example, the second KT state) that is more advantageous, and that a predetermined condition has been established (for example, the third probability variable jackpot, a high probability/high base state (first KT state ) 50 times or 100 times of fluctuation display is finished) based on the second special state can be controlled (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step 080IWS67A ~ S71A, S67B ~ S71B, S2226, S2227 ), and when controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the second identification information when being controlled to the non-special state, the second identification information is variable when being controlled to the second special state The predetermined condition is less likely to be established than when controlled to an advantageous state based on the display (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, the first probability variable jackpot or the second When a 2-probability variable jackpot occurs, it is immediately controlled to a high-probability/low-base state (second KT state), whereas the 1st-probability-variability jackpot and the second probability-variability are controlled during the low-probability/low-base state (normal state). When a big hit occurs, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (1st KT state), and after that, when the fluctuation display is completed 50 times or 100 times, the high probability / low base state ( is controlled to the second KT state)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the special state is configured to be controllable.

(Means 3) In means 1 or 2, when controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information while being controlled to the second special state, when controlled to the non-special state Predetermined conditions are more likely to be satisfied than when controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, during the low probability/low base state (normal state), the When the 1st probability variable jackpot or the 2nd probability variable jackpot occurs, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (1st KT state), and after that, when the variable display is completed 50 times or 100 times, the high probability / low base state ( 2nd KT state), while high probability / low base state (2nd KT state) immediately high probability / low base state (second 2KT state), and as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the selection rate of the first variable probability big hit and the second variable probability big hit is high). may have been According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose interest.

(Means 4) In any one of means 1 to 3, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") with different advantages for the player. In a game machine with a low advantage, the predetermined condition is more likely to be satisfied than when the advantage is set to a high setting value (specifically, FIG. 9-1 And as shown in FIG. 9-2, since the set value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability, it is executed up to 50 times or 100 times of fluctuation display that will result in a jackpot in the high probability/high base state (1st KT state). and transition to the high-probability/low base state (second KT state)). According to such a configuration, even when the advantage is set to a low set value, it is possible to create expectations and improve interest in the game.

(Means 5) In any of means 1 to 4, when the game state is switched (for example, when an irregular jackpot occurs, when the 50th change in the low probability/high base state is displayed) ), a special effect execution means (for example, step 080IWS503 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a shutter effect) that temporarily makes a predetermined display (for example, left, middle, and right decorative patterns) invisible S505, S506, S508, and S512), and the special effect executing means generates a specific image (for example, upper and lower shutters shown in FIGS. 9-43 (B) and 9-44 (A)) as a special effect. 080IW 033, 034) is displayed to make the predetermined display difficult to see, and then the specific image is separated to make the predetermined display visible (for example, FIG. 9- 43(C)-(F) and upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 shown in FIGS. 9-44(B), (C) are gradually opened). According to such a configuration, it is possible to smoothly hide the predetermined display and switch the display with a simple display in the special effect.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the first special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the character object control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big-hit probability and small-hit probability for every setting value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big-hit probability and small-hit probability for every setting value. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is an explanatory view for explaining the release pattern of the variable winning ball device and the special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special design variation process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design normal process. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design stop process. It is a flow chart which shows the role product control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a gate passage waiting process. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the list of the game states controlled after a big-hit game for every big-hit classification. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the game state. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the production|presentation control main process in the characteristic part 080IW. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a stop symbol of the small symbol. 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 10 is a flowchart showing variable display start waiting processing. 9 is a flowchart showing shutter effect start processing 1 and shutter effect start processing 2; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production|presentation processing during a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows ending production processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining a display mode of hitting to the right information. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rendering mode of a shutter rendering; It is an explanatory view for explaining a switching mode of the display of the decoration design. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect mode of the shutter effect executed in the 50th variation of the irregular jackpot or the low probability/high base state; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining image data used in a shutter effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a method of displaying a still image used in shutter effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing types of images displayed in a shutter effect; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation process in the first modification. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the first modification. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 1. FIG. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation process in the second modification. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the second modification. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 2. FIG. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the third modification. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 3. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation process in the fourth modification. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the fourth modification. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of switching display of decorative symbols in Modification 5; 15 is a flow chart showing a first special symbol stop process in Modification 6. FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing in modification 6; FIG.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

In addition, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there is provided a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation in which a shooting operation is performed aiming at the right side of the game area. there is The right-handed indicator 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and lighting is controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, a CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area is provided for displaying pending display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is being suspended. In this example, the first reserved display area 5A for displaying the reserved display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and the second reserved display for displaying the reserved indication corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 . Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed informing LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. Note that the LED 37 for hitting to the right is controlled to light up by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning hole is provided. A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When game balls are detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

In addition, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first starting winning opening, and is configured so that the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area do not enter the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. It is In this way, by providing the nail row 19 that prevents the entry of the game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the game area, the game ball can be shot toward the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed hitting). operation), the game ball can win in the first start winning hole.

In addition, in this example, only when left-handed operation is performed due to the provision of the row 19 of nails, the game ball is configured to be able to win in the first start winning hole, but such a mode is shown. not limited to For example, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first start winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the first starting winning opening on the left side of the game area, or the first starting winning opening A hole may be provided on the left side of the game area and a line of nails 19 may be provided so that the game ball can enter the first starting prize hole only when left-handed operation is performed.

A passage gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . A game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 .

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and is formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game balls flow down. A large winning opening positioned below the member is changed into an open state (also called an open state) in which a game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in a jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is forwardly moved toward, and the opening control is executed to open the big winning opening serving as the winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning hole for a small hit and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning hole are provided. 2, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged so as to be adjacent to it on the right side. These special variable winning ball device 17 and variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which game balls flow down is extended in the front-rear direction. By moving back and forth, the special winning port located below the bottom member and the second start winning port can be opened (also called an open state) in which game balls can win and a closed state (also called closed state) in which game balls cannot win. change to The special variable winning ball device 17 is a bottom member in a small winning game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small winning symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is forwardly moved, and the opening control is executed to open the special prize winning opening serving as the prize winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is forwardly moved when the symbol is drawn out and displayed by hitting the normal symbol display device 20, The opening control is executed to open the second start winning opening which is the winning area.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Also, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a closed state, the ball moves from the upper left to the lower right on the special variable winning ball device 7 and falls onto the variable winning ball device 6B therebelow.

Also, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left. If the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, the game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B. go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in an open state, the game ball falling into the second starting winning opening enters the special variable winning opening. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17 . On the other hand, if the second starting winning hole is not in an open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. - 特許庁At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward to open the special winning hole, the game ball enters the special winning hole. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in an open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Also, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom member. there is In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with regulation pieces, so that the game flows from the upper left to the lower right direction or from the upper right to the lower left direction. The flowing direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the motion of the forward/backward direction component, and the time required for the flowing down is delayed as compared with the case without the control piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the special variable prize ball device 6B is operated from the variable prize ball device 6B. In this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is provided in the big winning opening. When game balls are detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to open and the big winning opening is opened, the state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the big winning hole is closed, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the big winning hole to get a prize ball. be at a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When game balls are detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game balls pass through (enter) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than when the game balls enter the big winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls pass (enter) other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to open and the special winning opening is opened, the state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning hole is closed, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the special winning hole to obtain a prize ball. be at a disadvantage.

In addition, in the second starting winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball that has won in the second starting winning opening is provided. When game balls are detected by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start prize-winning opening and the second start prize-winning opening may be collectively referred to as the start prize-winning opening or the start opening.

In addition, in this pachinko game machine 1, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, so when the player is in a big win game or in a KT state (so-called small win time), the player aims at the right side of the game area and performs a shooting operation (so-called right hitting operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In this pachinko game machine 1, since the variable display of the normal symbols is executed based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the passage gate 41 plays a role of a normal starting area. However, even when a big win pattern is derived and displayed, the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the state shifts to a big win game state, so the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves both the normal starting region and the operating region.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a frame LED 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. .

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
In this pachinko game machine 1, when the game state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the left side of the game area and perform a shooting operation (so-called left-handed operation). When a game ball enters a first starting winning hole formed in a winning ball device 6A by a player's turning operation of a hitting ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 to perform a left-handed operation, a first special symbol is displayed. A first special game is started by the device 4A.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol differs depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, the result is a "big hit". . Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing". It should be noted that even in the first special game, the small winning symbols may be stop-displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be a "small winning".

After the display result in the first special game becomes ``big win'', on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, we have prepared multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning mouth, and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, probability variable state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, the game may be controlled to a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state depending on the jackpot type.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

In the KT state, KT control is executed in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. In this pachinko game machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small win game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than in the big win game state, but the state is advantageous for the player.

In the high-base state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period of fluctuating special figures) than in the normal state (time saving state). Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming more than the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

The variable probability state, the KT state, and the high base state continue until one of the end conditions, such as execution of the special game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state, is met first. do. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as the number of times cut (number of times cut probability variation etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a probability variable state, a KT state, a high base state, etc., and the display result in the special game is "big hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability of becoming, is controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, when the predetermined return processing is not executed after the power is turned on) It is in a state where

When the jackpot game ends and the game state is controlled to the variable probability state, KT state, or high base state, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the right side of the game area and perform a shooting operation (right hitting operation). A right-handed operation is performed by a player's rotation operation on a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern display device 20 starts a normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol varies depending on the type of big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit", If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the big winning symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the second special game becomes ``big hit'', on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the second special game becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to the small win game state.

In the small winning game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed).

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the lighting of the frame LED 9 Etc./turning off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switches (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100 . The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on solenoid 81, solenoid 82, solenoid 83) from game control microcomputer 100, and outputs solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and for large winning entrance door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special prize winning opening.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further controls a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-hand hitting notification LED 37. It supplies it to the substrate 13 and supplies an LED signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the LED) to the LED control substrate 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed informing LED 37, and drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed informing LED 37 based on the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed informing LED 37 are turned on/off. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lighting/extinguishing of the LED.

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, LED lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and LED signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process (step S25A). By the CPU 103 executing the first special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution of the first special symbol game, management of suspension, etc. are realized (details will be described later). Moreover, CPU103 performs a 2nd special design process process (step S25B). By the CPU 103 executing the second special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the second special symbol game are realized. In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol at the same time.

Following the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, the CPU 103 executes the role product control process (step S25C). The CPU 103 executes the accessory control process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing control of the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the control of the game state, and the like (details will be described later).

Following the role product control process, normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal which is a process for outputting a test signal for checking the control state of the game machine outside the game machine processing is also performed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 also performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that it is a period in which a right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the big win game, during the small win game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 does not perform control to output the right-handed test signal during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the start prize to the first start prize winning port, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start winning to the first start winning opening occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as the hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. be done. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the first pending memory number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the first pending memory number, the look-ahead determination etc. to the effect control board 12 Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning set to be transmitted in this way is effect control from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the substrate 12 .

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In each process (steps S110A to S113A) of the first special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result is determined. The jackpot type in the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the first special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. . After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The first variation pattern setting process of step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". In this first variation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes processing for determining either one. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process of step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". This first special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation process is completed. do.

In this example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. During the variable display of the special symbols, there is a case where the variable display of the second special symbols results in a small hit and the game is controlled to a small winning game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit is opened. Processing to determine whether or not the value corresponds to the small winning end processing), and if the small winning game is in progress, the value of the first special symbol process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. Thus, if it is not during the small winning game, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop processing. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to change is interrupted (timer It may be configured to interrupt the update).

Further, for example, the small winning ending period as the small winning ending processing period may be configured to vary depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes longer, and the period of execution of the variable display of the first special symbol and the suspension period become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decoration pattern, etc., resulting in an effect that gives the player a sense of incompatibility. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small winning ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, while the small winning ending period is 0.5 seconds in the normal state, the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small winning control, and no particular performance is performed, so the small winning ending period is shortened compared to the second KT state. It may be configured to On the other hand, in the second KT state, since the game ball is easy to win in the small winning control and an effect emphasizing the small winning control is executed, the small winning ending period may be lengthened compared to the first KT state. . In this case, for example, while the small winning ending period is 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, the length of the small winning fanfare period as the small winning opening preprocessing period may be changed according to the game state, similarly to the small winning ending period.

The first special symbol stop processing of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". In this first special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the variation of the first special symbol, and stops and displays (derives) the confirmed special symbol which is the display result of the first special symbol. It contains the process of setting. Then, when the display result is "big win", setting processing for starting the big win game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", processing for starting the small win game is performed. And the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is ``small hit'' or ``losing'', when it is controlled to the variable probability state, the KT state, or the high base state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop processing ends.

In addition, the process executed in the second special symbol process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process will be described. Also, each random number value extracted in the first starting winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in a second pending storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as pending information.

In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the second special symbol variation process is performed and the second special symbol is varied. During the display, there is a case where the variable display of the first special symbol results in a small win and the game is controlled to a small win game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit is opened. Processing-Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the small winning end processing), and if the small winning game is in progress, do not change the value of the second special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation processing. Thus, if it is not during the small winning game, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop processing. By performing such control, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the second special symbol starts to change is interrupted (timer It may be configured to interrupt the update).

Incidentally, regarding the small winning control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small winning fanfare period and the small winning ending period may be varied depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process. In this role product control process processing, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the role product control process flag provided in the RAM 102 . In addition, in each process (steps S120 to S128) of the role product control process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The role product control normal process of step S120 is executed when the value of the role product control process flag is "0". In this accessory control normal process, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big winning game is performed, and if the setting for starting the big winning game is performed, the process for starting the big winning game is performed. , the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process of step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "1". In this gate passage waiting process, control for waiting for passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is performed. When the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot opening pre-processing of step S122 is executed when the role product control process flag is "2". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "3", and the big hit opening pre-processing is completed.

The process during jackpot opening in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "3". In this jackpot opening processing, a processing for measuring the elapsed time from opening the jackpot, and based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the big winning gate to the closed state, the process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is executed, and then the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4". , ends the process during jackpot opening.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S124 is executed when the value of the role product control process flag is "4". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of execution times of the round has not reached the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the role control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of execution times of the round reaches the upper limit number of execution times, the character control process The flag value is updated to "5". When the value of the role product control process flag is updated, the jackpot opening post-processing ends.

The jackpot ending process of step S125 is executed when the value of the role product control process flag is "5". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control, KT control, and high-base control. When such setting is performed, the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the special winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "7". In this small winning open process, the processing of measuring the elapsed time after the special winning opening is opened, and the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the special winning port is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small winning open processing is ended.

The small hit end process of step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "8". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Control for operating various production devices such as actions is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and issuing a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14. Various effect control during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description on Characteristic Portion 080IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 080IW will be described. First, the game state in this characterizing portion 080IW will be described. First, the game state in this characterizing portion 080IW includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small win time) in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. The case of being controlled, the case of being controlled to a low probability and the first KT state (low probability/first KT state), and the case of being controlled to a high probability and the first KT state (high probability/first KT state). , is controlled to a high probability and second KT state (high probability/second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in an open state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, resulting in a small hit. Even if is generated, there are very few cases where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball per 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur and the high base state is controlled so that the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended. In addition, in the second KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is delivered to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur and the low base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In addition, the KT state is a game state in which a small win is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, in this characteristic portion 080IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state due to a normal game hit is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, while the ratio of determining a small hit is low when the first special symbol fluctuates, the ratio of determining a small hit when the second special symbol fluctuates is high (however, it will be described later). Therefore, the KT state is a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated mainly by causing the variation of the second special symbol, and the game state is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the configuration for making the KT state into a game state in which a small win is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state as a normal hit is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes By configuring the variation time of the selected variation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of times of variation in the KT state to a certain period of time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Further, this characteristic portion 080IW is configured so that the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41 is 0.6 seconds or longer. Specifically, the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the flow-down path of the game ball are adjusted. Although details will be described later, this characteristic part 080IW is configured such that the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to an open state based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, and the game ball passes through in the first KT state described later. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the required time until the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state, the one game ball passes through the passage gate 41. game balls can win prizes in the variable winning ball device 6B as they are.

(big hit probability, small hit probability)
FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big-hit probability and the small-hit probability for each set value. Among them, FIG. 9-1 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 9-2 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) can be set. Setting confirmation processing and setting change processing can be executed to check the current set values and change the set values. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, this example shows a case where the setting can be changed in six stages from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, but may be configured so that the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or in 7 or more steps.

First, with reference to FIG. 9-1, the big-hit probability and the small-hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in the non-variable state (low probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "247/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), the overall winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times compared to the non-variable probability state (low probability state). The value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "2470/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, with respect to small hits, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and (B), regardless of the set value "1" to "6" state) and probability variable state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "6298/65536". That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common in the non-variable probability state and the variable probability state. In this way, even if the big hit probability is changed according to the set value while the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. are set to different values from "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9-2, the big-hit probability and the small-hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), in the non-variable state (low probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "247/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 9-2 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), the winning probability of the overall jackpot is 10 times compared to the non-variable state (low probability state), and the setting The value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "2470/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, with regard to the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B), regardless of the set value "1" to "6" state) and probability variable state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "62986/65536". That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common in the non-variable probability state and the variable probability state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 9-2), compared with the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9-1), the small hit The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when performing the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit when performing the variable display of the first special symbol greater than the number of decision values for the decision). In this way, even if the big hit probability is changed according to the set value while the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. are set to different values from "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the determination values corresponding to deviation are included in the determination values corresponding to all set values "1" to "6" (FIG. 9-2). -1 and as shown in FIG. 9-2, there is no set value for which the probability of deviation is 0). The judgment value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the setting value (as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, depending on which setting value is "1" to "6") , with different outlier probabilities).

It should be noted that, without being limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured such that there is a case where the deviation probability is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include a determination value corresponding to deviation). For example, at the set value "6", which has the highest degree of advantage (highest jackpot probability), the odds of losing are 0, and the decision value corresponding to losing may not be included.

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured so that there is a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, the judgment value does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 9-1), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0, and the judgment value for the small hit may not be included. good.

In addition, in FIGS. 9-1 (A), (B) and FIGS. 9-2 (A), (B), the probability of a small hit is matched between the probability variation state (high probability state) and the non-probability variation state (low probability state) The odds of losing are different, but in the probability state (high probability state), the probability of hitting the jackpot has increased for the non-probability state (low probability state), so the probability of a small hit is higher than the non-probability state (low probability state). It may be lowered to match the outlier probabilities. Furthermore, even if the set values are different values such as "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. As a result, in a gaming machine with less than six stages that can be set substantially or a gaming machine with no difference in the degree of advantage due to the setting change function, a game machine of a type having a setting change function of six stages and a hardware/software configuration can be shared, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Jackpot type determination table)
9-3 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result should be a jackpot pattern, the type of jackpot is set to ``normal jackpot'', ``first probability variable jackpot'', or `` This table is referred to for determining either the second probability variable jackpot or the third probability variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in this characteristic portion 080IW, regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, With a probability of 35%, it is determined as a "normal jackpot", with a probability of 30%, it is determined as a "first variable jackpot", with a probability of 30%, it is determined as a "second variable jackpot", and with a probability of 5%, it is determined as a "second hit". 3 definite variable jackpot". In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), in this characteristic portion 080IW, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is determined to be a "normal jackpot" with a probability of 35%, "first variable jackpot" with a probability of 5%, and "second variable jackpot" with a probability of 10%, and with a probability of 50% It is determined as the "third probability variable jackpot".

"Normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a four-round jackpot game state and transitions to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game state ends. After shifting to the low-probability/high-base state, the low-probability/high-base state is maintained until 50 fluctuation displays are completed or the next big win occurs. Also, when the 50 times of fluctuation display is finished, the state shifts to the low probability/low base state.

The "first variable probability jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a four-round jackpot game state and transitions to a variable probability state (high probability state) after the jackpot game state is completed. In this case, depending on the game state when the variable display is stopped and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state) or the high probability/low base state (high probability/2nd KT state) ). After shifting to the high-probability/high-base state, the high-probability/high-base state is maintained until the 50th or 100th variation display is completed or the next big win occurs. Also, when 50 times or 100 times of variable display is completed, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state. In addition, when the player shifts to the high-probability/low-base state, the high-probability/low-base state is maintained until the next big win occurs.

"Second probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 10 rounds and shifted to a probability variable state (high probability state) after the jackpot game state is completed. In this case, depending on the game state when the variable display is stopped and the jackpot symbols are derived and displayed, the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state) or the high probability/low base state (high probability/2nd KT state) ). After transitioning to the high probability/high base state, the high probability/high base state is maintained until 50 fluctuation displays are completed or the next big win occurs. Also, when the 50 times of fluctuation display is completed, the state shifts to the high probability/low base state. In addition, when the player shifts to the high-probability/low-base state, the high-probability/low-base state is maintained until the next big win occurs.

The "third probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 10 rounds and shifted to a probability variable state (high probability state) after the jackpot game state is completed. In this case, regardless of the game state when the variation display is stopped and the jackpot symbols are derived and displayed, the game state is shifted to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when the player shifts to the high-probability/low-base state, the high-probability/low-base state is maintained until the next big win occurs.

In this example, the high-probability/low base state (second KT state) is more advantageous than the high-probability/high base state (first KT state) because it is easier for the game ball to enter the special winning hole during the small win game. Therefore, in this example, the "third probability variable jackpot" is the most advantageous jackpot type, the "second probability variable jackpot" is the second most advantageous jackpot type, and the "first probability variable jackpot" is the second most advantageous jackpot type. It is a big hit type, and "normal big hit" is the most disadvantageous big hit type.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the selection probability of "normal jackpot", "first probability variable jackpot", and "second probability variable jackpot" Since it is high, the high-probability/low base state (2nd KT state) is likely to end when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the high-probability/low base state (2nd KT state) and a big win is achieved. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the selection probability of the "third probability variable jackpot" is high, so the variable display of the second special symbol during the high probability/low base state (second KT state). is executed to result in a big hit, the high probability/low base state (second KT state) tends to continue.

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process processing (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (normal symbol hit), and based on the determination result, the normal symbol is displayed. Control is performed to execute variable display. In this example, 99/100 is uniformly applied regardless of whether it is in the probability variable state, whether it is in the KT state, or whether it is in the high base state. It is determined to be a normal pattern with a probability of . Further, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a high base flag indicating a high base state is set, and if the high base flag is set (if in a high base state), the variable winning ball device 6B. is open for a long period of 5.5 seconds, and if the high base flag is not set (if it is in a low base state), the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a short period of 0.2 seconds. Control.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6 are explanatory diagrams showing variation patterns (variation times) of special symbols and decorative symbols used in this characterizing portion 080IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 12 for the first special design and decorative design, and the second variation pattern for the second special design and decorative design 34 types #01 to #34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, fluctuation pattern #n (n=01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern for non-KT time shown in FIG. 9-4 (A) A table is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-4(A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the first variation patterns #01 to #06 is determined.

Also, if the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability/1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1st KT state is completed. , the first special symbol variation pattern table for low probability/first KT and fiftieth variation shown in FIG. 9-4(B) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability / 1st KT state, any of the first variation patterns #07 to #09 is determined by As shown in FIG. 9-5(G), in the low-probability/first KT state fiftieth variation display, first variation patterns #07 to #09 with a relatively short variation time of 5 seconds are determined.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, if it is a KT state other than the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state (low probability / 1st KT state, high probability / 1st KT state, high probability / 2nd KT state) , the first special symbol variation pattern table for other KT shown in FIG. 9-4 (C) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-4(C), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in other KT states, one of the first variation patterns #10 to #12 is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern for non-KT time shown in FIG. 9-5 (D) A table is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-5(D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the second variation patterns #01 to #03 is determined. Specifically, when it is determined that it is lost, the second variation pattern #01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when determining a small hit, the second variation pattern #02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when determining a big hit, the second variation pattern #03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a relatively long period of 5 minutes.

In this characteristic part 080IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is achieved, a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game ball into the special winning hole. end up Therefore, in this characteristic part 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (D), even if the second special symbol is displayed in a non-KT state, the fluctuation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is increased. By lowering , the frequency of occurrence of small hits is rather reduced, thereby preventing a situation in which an attempt is made to acquire prize balls by small hits even in the non-KT state. In addition, in this characteristic part 080IW, the "occurrence frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, the small hits per unit time is higher than normal.

It should be noted that in this characteristic portion 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (D), when the second special symbol variation display is executed during the non-KT state, even if a big hit is achieved, the variation time is comparatively long as 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at a prize ball by winning a prize in the special prize winning opening unfairly during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big win, it is not necessary to digest the first reserved memory longer than in the case of a small win, so the variation time is set to be shorter than in the case of a small win. there is

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of the low probability/first KT state, the number of times of variation after finishing the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/first KT state. Select the variation pattern table accordingly. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability/first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 9-5 (E) is selected and varied. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (E), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #04 to #06 is determined by

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (E), when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability / 1st KT state is lost, the variation time is 5 seconds and the shortened variation is the second variation pattern # 04. It is determined. Also, when determining a small hit as the first variation in the low probability / 1st KT state, the second variation pattern # 05 (second start winning opening open Preparatory fluctuation pattern). In this characteristic part 080IW, as already explained, when it is controlled to the first KT state, although the frequency of small hits increases, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is lengthened. A special winning hole in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after shifting to the low probability/first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately If the device 17 is controlled in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will enter the special prize winning opening. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 080IW, in the first variation of the 1KT state, by ensuring a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 are activated before the transition to the 1KT state. A special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be opened after a sufficient time has passed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom surface member fall down to enable winning to a special winning hole. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which more prize balls than expected are obtained in the 1KT state. Also, when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability/first KT state is a big hit, the second variation pattern #06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, if the variation display of the 2nd to 49th variation is executed after finishing the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1st KT state, the low probability shown in FIG. 9-5 (F) The second special symbol variation pattern table for the probability/first KT and for the 2nd to 49th variation is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / 1st KT state, the second variation pattern # 07 to # 13 Either is decided. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (F), when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability / 1st KT state are missed, the fluctuation time is 5 seconds and the short fluctuation second fluctuation pattern # 07, or a second variation pattern #08 with a shorter variation time of 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th variations of the low probability/1st KT state are out, the second variation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. In addition, when determining a small hit as the 2nd to 49th variations of the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #10 with a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, or a shorter variation time of 1 second. It may be determined to be the second variation pattern #11 of shortening variation. On the other hand, when determining a small hit as the 2nd to 49th variations in the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns #07 and #10 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns #08 and #11 are those in which one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the storage of the reserved memory is expedited and the operating rate is increased. Also, when determining a big hit as the 2nd to 49th variations in the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #13 with reach is determined.

Also, if the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability/1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1st KT state is completed. , the second special symbol variation pattern table for low probability/first KT and fiftieth variation shown in FIG. 9-5 (G) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability / 1st KT state, any of the second variation patterns #14 to #16 is determined by As shown in FIG. 9-5(G), in the 50th variation display in the low probability/1st KT state, the image display device 5 executes a shutter effect, and the variation time is 5 seconds, which is a relatively short variation display. 2 variation patterns #14 to #16 are determined.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-4, when the variation display of the first special symbol in the other KT state results in a big hit, the first variation pattern # with a variation time of 10 seconds 10. This is a case in which a big hit occurs immediately after the transition to the second KT state due to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is a forced loss, the forced failure occurs frequently and the player wins a small win despite being in the second KT state. You will not receive any benefit from Therefore, in this characteristic part 080IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, the transition to the big hit game state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol is made before the frequent occurrence of the forced loss. It is configured.

In addition, unlike this characteristic portion 080IW, even when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, the configuration that does not force the variation of the second special symbol (for example, the first When the second special symbol is fluctuating when the special symbol is stopped, the second special symbol is forcibly removed), the variation time of the first special symbol big hit during the KT state. may be a long variable time (eg, 1 minute). This is a case in which a big hit occurs immediately after shifting to the second KT state due to the variation display of the first special symbol, and if the variation time of the big win is set to the same short variation time as the loss, the player will not be able to win. You will not be able to receive any profits from small wins. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the first special symbol jackpot in the KT state is set to a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, there is enough time to generate at least multiple small hits. (eg, 1 minute).

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability/first KT state, a big win game based on the first variable probability big win or the second variable probability big win that triggered the high probability/first KT state is performed. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations after the end. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability/first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 9-6 (H) is selected and varied. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #17 to #21 is determined by

As with the first variation in the low-probability/1st KT state, as shown in FIG. There is a case where the second variation pattern #17, which is short variation of 5 seconds, is determined. On the other hand, even if it is determined to be a loss as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #18 with reach may be determined. In addition, even when it is determined to be a small hit as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the variation pattern (second variation pattern #19) for preparing for opening the second start winning opening may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #20 with reach may be determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 9-6(H), when determining a big hit as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #21 with reach is determined.

Also, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after finishing the jackpot game based on the first variable probability jackpot or the second probability variable jackpot that triggered the high probability/first KT state, see FIG. 9-6. A second special symbol variation pattern table for high probability/first KT and second and subsequent variations shown in (I) is selected to determine a variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed after the second variation in the high probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #22 to #28 determined by

It should be noted that, as with the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/1st KT state, as shown in FIG. A second variation pattern #22 of shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds or a second variation pattern #23 of shortened variation with an even shorter variation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a miss as the second and subsequent variations of the high probability/first KT state, it may be determined to the second variation pattern #24 with reach. In addition, when determining a small hit as the second and subsequent variations of the high probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #25 with a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, or a shortened variation with a shorter variation time of 1 second The second variation pattern #26 of variation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as a small hit as the second and subsequent variations in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns #22 and #25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns #23 and #26 are those in which one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the storage of the reserved memory is expedited and the operating rate is increased. Also, when determining a big hit as the second and subsequent variations in the high-probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability/second KT state, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability/second KT shown in FIG. 9-6 (J) is A variation pattern is determined upon selection. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (J), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state, any one of the second variation patterns #29 to #34 is determined. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (J), when it is determined to be a failure in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #29 with a shortened variation with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In other cases, the second variation pattern #30 of normal variation with a variation time of 5 seconds may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a miss in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #31 with reach may be determined. Also, when it is determined to be a small hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern # 32 with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds or a normal variation time of 5 seconds The second variation pattern #33 of variation may be determined. Also, when determining a big hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #34 with reach is determined.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. 9-7(1) shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 respectively in the 1KT state, and FIG. 9-7(2) respectively shows the opening patterns in the 2KT state. The opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 are shown.

First, the release patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the 1KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 9-7(1). As shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display device 20 performs normal symbol variation display, When it is determined to be a normal pattern hit, the winning pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20, and when it is determined to be a loss, the lost pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20.例文帳に追加In this characteristic portion 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the variation time of normal symbols is set to 0.2 seconds, and the symbol determination time for deriving and displaying winning symbols and losing symbols is set to 0.2 seconds. ing. Then, when the winning pattern is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. After a lapse of time, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and a game ball can enter the second starting winning hole.

When the game ball wins in the second starting prize opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is decided to make a small hit, A small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small winning pattern is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball wins in the special winning opening. becomes possible. However, in the 1KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the variable winning ball device on the upstream side 6B has a long release time of 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to enter the special winning hole (for example, about one ball per 100 fluctuation displays).

In the 1KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), after finishing the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B, the opening of the next variable winning ball device 6B can be performed only in the next normal symbol. It is after at least 0.5 seconds, which is the total of 0.2 seconds of fluctuation time, 0.2 seconds of design determination time, and 0.1 seconds of pre-processing time for opening the second start winning opening, has passed. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 080IW, in the first KT state, a closed period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 080IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state by: After 0.5 seconds, which is the total of the normal symbol fluctuation time 0.2 seconds, the symbol determination time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, and the game ball It is configured to take about 0.6 seconds from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Thus, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the state where the normal symbols are not changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is more The variable winning ball device 6B is already opened because the time from the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 to the arrival of the game ball at the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the game ball normally does not change the pattern. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when it is controlled to the state. Therefore, in the first KT state, a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state in which the normal symbols are not changed easily wins the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the release patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the 2KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 9-7(2). As shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display device 20 performs normal symbol variation display, When it is determined to be a normal pattern hit, the winning pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20, and when it is determined to be a loss, the lost pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20.例文帳に追加In this characteristic portion 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the variation time of normal symbols is set to 1.0 seconds, and the symbol determination time for deriving and displaying winning symbols and losing symbols is set to 0.2 seconds. ing. Then, when the winning pattern is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), after the pattern fixing time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process is set to 2.6 seconds. After a lapse of time, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole.

When the game ball wins in the second starting prize opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is decided to make a small hit, A small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small winning pattern is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball wins in the special winning opening. It becomes possible.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. In addition, in this characteristic portion 080IW, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is at least 3.8 seconds (ordinary design fluctuation time 1.0 seconds + design determination time 0 A relatively long period of 0.2 seconds + 2.6 seconds before the second start winning opening processing is ensured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. A game ball easily enters a special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side and easily enters a special winning hole.

In addition, in the second KT state, game balls are likely to enter the special winning hole and prize balls are easily obtained. ” is displayed.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 080IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state because After 3.8 seconds, which is the total of the normal symbol fluctuation time 1.0 seconds, the symbol determination time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-processing time 2.6 seconds, and the game ball It is configured to take about 0.6 seconds from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Thus, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is The variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state because it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal pattern is not varied. The game ball reaches the variable prize winning ball device 6B before being controlled to . Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state in which the normal symbols are not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 080IW, the process of executing the variable display of normal symbols and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is performed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103). (see step S26) is executed. In addition, the game control microcomputer 100, in the normal symbol process processing of step S26, determines whether the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), or whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state. Regardless of whether there is a jackpot game state or not, the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%) is used to determine whether or not to hit a regular pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 080IW, the normal symbol fluctuation time and the symbol fixing time are the same in the 1st KT state and the 2nd KT state by 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the second start winning opening opening processing is the same. A case has been shown in which the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is varied by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state. can't For example, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to have different closing periods (interval periods) by differentiating the fluctuation time and the symbol fixing time between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second starting winning hole opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning hole opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closed period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be changed by changing the variable winning ball device 6B. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress the winning of prizes in the special winning openings in the first KT state. .

As will be described later, in the first KT state, the characteristic portion 080IW controls to the high base state by setting a high base flag indicating the high base state, thereby achieving the high base state shown in FIG. 9-7 (1). In this way, control is performed so that the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B is lengthened. In addition, in the second KT state, by controlling to the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIG. ing.

In addition, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, as shown in FIG. The variable winning ball device 6B is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 9-7 (2) is opened for a short time. It may be configured to control with a 2-open pattern (short open). That is, the special flag may be set only in the 1KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the jackpot game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, when executing the last variable display in the low probability/first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened. For example, the above-mentioned special flag may be erased according to the 49th special symbol variation stop in the 50 special symbol shortened variation periods in the low probability/first KT state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 6B being open for a long time when the left-hand shot is notified after the low probability/first KT state is ended. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured using the flag (special flag) for controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variable display of the special symbol is used. In this case, the special flag and the shortening variation flag may be separately managed and controlled.

Also, the variable winning ball device 6B may be short-circuited during the low probability/non-KT state. With such a configuration, in the case of the low probability/non-KT state (left-handed state), when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability, only a few game balls are shot. , it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning, and it is possible to prevent the right-handed operation from being performed during the low-probability/non-KT state.

Incidentally, in this characteristic portion 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. For example, when the variable display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning balls are variable winning balls in a state where the normal symbols are stopped from varying and there is no reserved memory of the normal symbols. This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture aiming at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (when it becomes a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate The variable winning ball device 6B does not open until the game ball passing through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the winning of the special winning hole becomes possible). On the other hand, in this characteristic part 080IW, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened before the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. is set to start, it is possible to eliminate capture elements by a shooting operation aimed at the timing of occurrence of a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Production control command)
9-8 and 9-9 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8, commands 8000(H) to 800C(H) and 8011(H) to 8032(H) are decorations variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to variable display of special symbols. It is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern of the symbol. It should be noted that the effect control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 800C (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts variable display of the decoration pattern. Control.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (loss designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is to be lost. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (first probability variable jackpot designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is the first probability variable jackpot) is. Command 9004 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 designation command (second probability variable big hit designation command) that designates the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command as the second probability variable big hit) is. Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (third probability variable big hit designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is the third probability variable big hit) is. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 6 designation command may be referred to as display result designation commands. In addition, in this characteristic part 080IW, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display result designation command received immediately before the first variation pattern command by the effect control CPU 120 is It can be determined that it is a display result specifying command for the first special symbol, and the display result specifying command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result specifying command for the second special symbol, so the display result The specified command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result specified command for the first special symbol and the display result specified command for the second special symbol may be separate.

In addition, instead of the game control microcomputer 100 transmitting the display result designation command, the variation pattern is made to correspond to each of the normal jackpot/first probability variable jackpot/second probability variable jackpot/third probability variable jackpot/minor hit/loss. A command is determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop pattern of the decoration pattern based on the received variation pattern command.

Command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) that designates that lighting of the right-handed display 26 is finished. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) that designates that lighting of the right-handed display 26 has been started.

Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying stop of variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. Command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second compulsory design determination designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the second special design is forcibly stopped.

Command BXXX(H) (X=arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big win game to the end of the big win game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of a big hit game. B001(H) is an effect control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of a small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (large winning opening open display command) that designates display during the round during the big win game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (post-opening big winning opening display command) that designates a post-round display (display of an interval between rounds) during a big win game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has entered a large winning opening. Command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won in the first start winning opening while the number of first reserved memories has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the second start winning opening while the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first effective start winning prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second effective start winning prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second effective start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 .

Command D000 (H) is a production control command (first customer waiting demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is a production control command (second customer waiting demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Also, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

Command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability/non-KT background designation command) for designating background display when the game state is low probability/non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability/first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the game state is low probability/first KT state. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the game state is high probability/first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability/second KT state.

Command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) that designates the currently set setting value. Note that the setting value is set to "XX". For example, when the setting value is set to "1", command E101(H) is transmitted as the setting value command. Further, for example, when the setting value is set to "6", the command E106(H) is transmitted as the setting value command.

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 9-8 and FIG. Incidentally, the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. FIG. For example, a more detailed production control command related to the jackpot game and a production control command indicating a game state (for example, a production control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 .

(First special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 9-10 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is the case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S110A, it means that the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed in the first special symbol display device 4A.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the character product control process flag indicates the normal character product control process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 080IWS50A). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the normal accessory control process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 080IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is checked. If the first pending memory number is 0, a first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS52A).

If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102, (Step 080IWS53A), the value of the first reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step 080IWS54A). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is changed to the first reserved memory number=n− Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's like That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so the order in which each random number value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiably preserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 080IWS55A). In this example, the set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 080IWS55A. A set value command is also sent when

The timing of transmitting the set value command is not limited to that shown in this example. It may be configured to

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined to be in a low probability/non-KT state, and a low probability/non-KT background designation command is issued. In some cases, it is determined that it is in the low probability/1st KT state, and a low probability/1st KT background designation command is issued. Determine and issue a high probability/first KT background designation command, and if the variable probability flag is on and the high base flag is off, determine that it is in a high probability/second KT state and issue a high probability/second KT background designation command, Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the second special symbol is in the midst of a big hit variation (step 080IWS57A). Concretely, when the second big win flag indicating that the big win will be made is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the second special symbol is in the middle of the big win variation. When it is determined that the second special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 080IWS67A without performing the processing after step 080IWS58A. As a result, when the variation of the first special pattern is started during the big hit variation of the second special pattern, it is forcibly lost regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly detaching is not limited to the one described above. For example, in step 080IWS57A, when the second special symbol is in the midst of a big hit fluctuation, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) as a hit determination random number is performed, and by moving to step 080IWS59A, at the time of starting winning A win may be forcibly determined regardless of which hit determination random number has been obtained.

Also, for example, when the second special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation at step 080IWS57A, without performing the processing of steps 080IWS58A to S63A, a random number value (fixed value) is set as a hit determination random number and a small value is set. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly lost regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

If the second special symbol is not in the middle of the big hit variation, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 080IWS58A) and executes the big hit determination module (step 080IWS59A). The big-hit determination module is a program that determines that a big-hit will be made when the hit-judgment random number matches a predetermined big-hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big win (step 080IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first big win flag indicating that a big win will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 080IWS61A). . Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, a first variable probability jackpot, a second variable probability jackpot, or a third variable probability jackpot (step 080IWS62A), and the jackpot type is stored ( Step 080IWS63A), and shift to step 080IWS67A.

Further, when the big hit is not determined at step 080IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 080IWS64A). The small-hit determination module is a program that determines a small-hit if the random number for the hit determination (random number for the small-hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small-hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 080IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small win flag indicating that a small win will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step 080IWS66A). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS67A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of remaining high base states is "0" (step 080IWS67A), and if it is "0", step 080IWS74A. to If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 080IWS68A), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 080IWS69A). If the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 080IWS74A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 080IWS70A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 080IWS71A). If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the process proceeds to step 080IWS74A. If the probability variable flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability variable state), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the special figure time saving flag indicating that the variable display of the special symbols is being shortened (step 080IWS72A ). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended until the end of variation (step 080IWS73A). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS74A.

In this characteristic portion 080IW, as will be described later, the reason why the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the variable display in the high base state is managed is the low probability/high base state ( low probability/1st KT state) and 50 times of variable display is executed, and at the end of the jackpot game based on the 1st probability variable jackpot or the 2nd probability variable jackpot, high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT) state) and 50 or 100 times of variable display is performed. In the case of the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), when starting the 50th variation display, it is determined as Y in steps 080IWS69A and S69B, and determined as N in steps 080IWS71A and S71B. Then, the high base flag is reset in steps 080IWS70A, S70B, and the special figure time saving flag is also reset in steps 080IWS72A, S72B, and the transition to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) . On the other hand, in the case of the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), when starting the 50th or 100th variation display, it is determined as Y in steps 080IWS69A and S69B, and steps 080IWS71A and 080IWS71A. It is judged as Y in S71B, the high base flag is reset in steps 080IWS70A and S70B, and the state shifts to the high probability/low base state (second KT state).

In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) continues the right-handed notification and continues the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as a game state, the fluctuation reduction common to the 1st KT state This is a flag for setting the effect background in common with the first KT state while maintaining the state.

Then, in step 080IWS74A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 080IWS74A). Although not shown, the symbols to be stopped are determined immediately before step 080IWS74A.

In step 080IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability-variable big-hit determination table or the probability-variable big-hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

(First variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 9-11 is a flow chart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first sets a special figure time saving flag or lighting extension flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. is confirmed (step 080IWS1700A). In addition, in this example, the special figure time saving flag and the lighting extension flag are set and the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol is performed, so that it is more advantageous to execute the variation display of the second special symbol ( (See FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6), it becomes a state in which small hits are likely to occur, so the state is controlled to the KT state. If neither the special figure time saving flag nor the lighting extension flag is set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is used as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, FIG. 9-4 The first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in (A) is selected (step 080IWS1701A).

If the special figure time saving flag or the lighting extension flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is the first for KT as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. A special symbol variation pattern table is selected (step 080IWS1702A). At step 080IWS1702A, if the lighting extension flag is set (that is, if the last variation display in the low-probability/first KT state is executed, the Select the first special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / 1KT time and 50th variation shown.On the other hand, if the special figure time saving flag is set, others shown in Figure 9-4 (C) Select the first special symbol variation pattern table for KT.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 080IWS1701A and S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, It determines which of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 9-4 is to be used (step 080IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern for which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1704A).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 080IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the first variation time timer and sets the variation time. measurement is started (step 080IWS1705A), and the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 080IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 080IWS1707A).

(First special symbol variation process)
FIG. 9-12 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role product control process (step S120) (step 080IWS1120A). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the role product control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103, if not yet transmitted, determines whether or not to make a big hit, and the type of the big win. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit any display result designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step 080IWS1122A), and when the first variable time timer times out (step 080IWS1123A), performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 080 IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 080IWS1135A).

When the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step 080IWS1125A). In addition, whether or not the second special symbol is displayed in a variable display is, for example, confirmed whether the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to a process other than the second special symbol normal process. can be determined by If the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS1126A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag (step 080IWS1127A). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 080IWS1128A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1129A).

If it is determined as Y in step 080IWS1125A and if it is determined as Y in step 080IWS1126A, after starting the variation display of the first special symbol as the final variation in the low probability/high base state (1st KT state), the variation display is terminated. This is the case where the variable display of the second special symbol has started before. In this case, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 080IWS1127A to S1129A, after starting the variation display of the first special symbol as the final variation in the low probability/high base state (1KT state), the variation display If the variable display of the second special symbol is started before the end of , the lighting extension flag is reset at the timing of the start of the variable display of the second special symbol to end the low probability / high base state. and then transition to the low-probability/low-base state (normal state).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B is deriving and displaying the jackpot symbol (step 080IWS1130A). Whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing, It can be determined by confirming whether or not a second big hit flag indicating that a big hit will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol is set.

If the second special symbol display device 4B does not derive and display the big winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the small winning symbol (step 080IWS1131A). Whether or not the small winning symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not a second small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol is set. If the second special symbol display device 4B does not derive and display the small winning symbol, the process is terminated as it is.

If the second special symbol display device 4B is deriving and displaying a small winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol being executed will result in a big winning (step 080IWS1132A). . It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed will result in a big hit can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed becomes a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a probability variable big hit (first probability variable big hit to third probability variable big hit) (step 080IWS1133A). ). Whether or not it is a variable probability big hit (first variable probability big hit to third variable probability big win) can be determined, for example, by confirming the type of big win stored in step 080IWS63A. If it is a probability variable jackpot (first probability variable jackpot to third probability variable jackpot), the process is terminated as it is.

When the big hit pattern is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y of step 080IWS1130A), or when the small winning pattern is derived and displayed (Y of step 080IWS1131A) and the probability variable jackpot (first probability variable jackpot to second 3 probability variable jackpot) (that is, a normal jackpot) is being executed (Y of step 080IWS1132A, N of step 080IWS1133A), the CPU 103 instructs the CPU 120 for effect control to 1 Perform control to transmit a compulsory pattern determination designation command (step 080IWS1134A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 080IWS1135A).

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS1130A to S1134A, in this characteristic part 080IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, or when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit. When the variable display of the first special symbol, which usually results in a big hit, is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously hit the jackpot. We are trying to prevent situations where small hits occur. In this case, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forced out, the variation of the decoration symbol is based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted at step 080IWS1134A. As a result of the display, control is performed so as to forcibly stop and display the lost pattern.

In this example, it is the case that the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes the probability variable big hit is being executed. In some cases, the first special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see Y in step 080IWS1133A). The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the process shifts to a small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, step 080IWS1120A is determined as N, steps 080IWS1121A to S1135A are skipped, and step 080IWS1122A does not update the first variable time timer. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a probability variation big win is being executed, the first variation time timer is set during the small win game. is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, it is a case where the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit. If there is, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N of step 080IWS1132A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol results in a small win and the variation display of the first special symbol resulting in a loss or a small win is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small win game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small winning game is finished, the update of the first variable time timer is resumed.

(First special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-13 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 080IWS2010A). If the variable probability flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a variable probability storage flag indicating that the game state at the end of the variable display was the variable probability state (step 080IWS2011A). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag or lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS2012A). If the high base flag or lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the high base memory flag indicating that the game state at the end of the variable display was the high base state (step 080IWS2013A).

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS2010A to S2013A, in this example, it is temporarily recorded that the game state at the end of the variable display was the probability variable state or the high base state.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS2014A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 080IWS2015A). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 080IWS2016A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2017A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who performed the right-handed operation is in favor of the player and the hit-right indicator 26 is illuminated. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit during the low probability/first KT state, but by executing the processing of steps 080IWS67A to S73A, the first special symbol is displayed as the 50th variation display. It is determined to end the low probability/first KT state when starting the variable display, and the processing of steps 080IWS2014A to S2017A is executed, so that when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, the low probability/first After finishing the 1KT state and shifting to the normal state (non-KT state), the right-handed indicator 26 is extinguished. However, as already explained, by executing the processing of steps 080IWS1125A to S1129A, after starting the variation display of the first special symbol as the final variation in the low probability/first KT state, before ending the variation display If the variable display of the second special symbol is started at the beginning of the variable display of the second special symbol, the low probability/high base state is terminated at the timing of the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the low probability/low base state (normal state ).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 080IWS2018A). Incidentally, in this case, if the first compulsory design confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 080IWS1134A of the first special design variation processing, regardless of the determination result at the start of variation, the first special design is forced as the stop design. Derivation and display of the target missing pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step 080IWS2019A). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag indicating that the jackpot will start (step 080IWS2020A). Also, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 080IWS2021A).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed indicator 26 (step 080IWS2022A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2023A). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2032A.

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS2022A and S2023A, in this example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started when a big hit is achieved in the variation display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big win game. , and the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

In this example, after the big-hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big-hit game is started based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, so the right-hand shot is made at the timing when the game ball passes the passage gate 41. You may comprise so that lighting of the indicator 26 may be started.

If the first jackpot flag is not set (step 080IWS2019A N), the CPU 103 resets the probability variable memory flag and high base memory flag (step 080IWS2024A). In this example, the processing of steps 080IWS2010A to S2013A is executed to set the variable probability storage flag and the high base storage flag, and once the game state at the end of the variable display is the variable probability state or the high base state is recorded. However, in the case of deriving and displaying a winning symbol or a small winning symbol, the process of step 080IWS2024A is executed to reset the variable probability storage flag and the high base storage flag.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 080IWS2025A). When the 1st small hit flag is set, control which transmits the small hit start designation command vis-a-vis production control CPU120 is done (step 080IWS2026A). Also, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 080IWS2027A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning opening preprocessing (step 080IWS2031A). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2032A.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 080IWS2032A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a right-handed notification prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the right of the game area. there is In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a launch promotion notification that prompts the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41 as a right hitting notification. may be

In addition, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed with the second special pattern, the right hitting notification and the launch promotion notice are not executed, and when the game ball wins in the first start winning hole in that state, the right hitting notice and the launch promotion notice are given. (In this case, since it is in the state of waiting for passage through the gate, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the first special symbol variable display is not started immediately, and the first reservation storage is performed) can be configured to

Conversely, when the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the degree of recognition is low (for example, sound output at a low volume or small screen display). may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), when the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening or the special winning opening is detected, the degree of recognition is high (for example, loud sound output, (Large screen display) may be configured to notify left-handed players. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately perform the launch notification. In particular, according to the above configuration, for a player who accidentally shoots a game ball to the right side of the game area, a slight left-handed notification is given in a mode in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is low. For a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, a left-handed notification may be given in a mode in which the degree of awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt the game store clerk to return to the left-handed operation to the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation.

Further, in the above case, when the number of game balls detected at the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening reaches a certain number, it may be configured to perform left-handed notification. In addition, at the passage gate 41, when a game ball is detected multiple times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), left-handed notification is performed, and at the second start winning opening and special winning opening, more than a predetermined number It may be configured such that when game balls of a specific number (for example, one) or more are detected, a left-handed notification is performed.

In this characteristic part 080IW, a demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display being executed may be terminated and left-handed notification may be performed.

(Second special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 9-14 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner in the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the character product control process flag indicates the normal character product control process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 080IWS50B). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role product control process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 080IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is checked. If the second pending memory number is 0, a second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS52B).

If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102, (Step 080IWS53B), decrease the value of the second reserved storage number by 1 (subtract 1 from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter), and shift the contents of each storage area (step 080IWS54B). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is changed to the second reserved memory number=n− Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's like That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so the order in which each random number value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 080IWS55B). In this example, the set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 080IWS55B. A set value command is also sent when

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS56B). It should be noted that the specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 080IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the first special symbol is in the middle of a big hit variation (step 080IWS57B). Concretely, when the first big win flag indicating that the big win is to be achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the first special symbol is in the midst of the big win variation. When it is determined that the first special symbol is in the middle of the big hit variation, the process proceeds to step 080IWS67B without performing the processing after step 080IWS58B. Thus, when the variation of the second special pattern is started during the big hit variation of the first special pattern, it is forced to lose regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly detaching is not limited to the one described above. For example, in step 080IWS57B, when the first special symbol is in the midst of a big hit change, a random number value (fixed value) is set as a hit determination random number, and by moving to step 080IWS59B, any Regardless of whether or not the random number for the hit determination has been obtained, the game may be forcibly lost.

Also, for example, when the first special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation at step 080IWS57B, the process of steps 080IWS58B to S63B is not performed, and a random value (fixed value) is set as the random number for hit determination, and a small value is set. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly lost regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

If the first special symbol is not in the process of the big hit change, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 080IWS58B) and executes the big hit determination module (step 080IWS59B). The big-hit determination module is a program that determines that a big-hit will be made when the hit-judgment random number matches a predetermined big-hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big win (step 080IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big win flag indicating that a big win will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 080IWS61B). . Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the first variable probability jackpot, the second variable probability jackpot, or the third variable probability jackpot (step 080IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored ( Step 080IWS63B), and shift to step 080IWS67B.

Further, when the game control microcomputer 100 does not make a big hit at step 080IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 080IWS64B). The small-hit determination module is a program that determines a small-hit if the random number for the hit determination (or the random number for the small-hit determination) matches a predetermined small-hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 080IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small win flag indicating that a small win will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol ( step 080IWS66B). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS67B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 080IWS67B), and if it is "0", proceeds to step 080IWS74B. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 080IWS68B), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 080IWS69B). If the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 080IWS74B. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 080IWS70B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 080IWS71B). If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the process proceeds to step 080IWS74B. If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability variation state), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the special figure time saving flag indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is being shortened (step 080IWS72B ). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 080IWS73B). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS74B.

Then, in step 080IWS74B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 080IWS74B). Although not shown, the symbols to be stopped are determined immediately before step 080IWS74B.

In step 080IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability-variable big-hit determination table or the probability-variable big-hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 9-11. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 9-11, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process will be described. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 080IWS1700A, and confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag or the lighting extension flag is set. If neither the special figure time saving flag nor the lighting extension flag is set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, FIG. Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in 5(D). If the special figure time saving flag or the lighting extension flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set, and the number of variations Accordingly, as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, select any one of the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown in FIGS. 9-5 (E) to 9-6 (J) . For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / if the 1st KT state), if it is the first variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-5 (E) , select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-5 (F) if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, and if the 50th variation is the second Select the special symbol variation pattern table. Also, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (if the high probability/1st KT state), the second special symbol variation shown in FIG. 9-6 (H) if the first variation The pattern table is selected, and if it is after the second variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-6 (I) is selected. Also, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability/second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-6 (J) is selected. In addition, the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability/first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 9-5 (G) based on the fact that the lighting extension flag is set. You may do so.

(Second special symbol variation process)
FIG. 9-15 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role product control process (step S120) (step 080IWS1120B). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the role product control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103, if not yet transmitted, determines whether or not to make a big hit, and the type of the big win. Based on the result of determination, control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 080IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 080IWS1123B), performs control to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 080 IWS 1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 080IWS1135B).

When the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed (step 080IWS1125B). Whether or not the first special symbol is displayed in a variable display is, for example, confirmed whether or not the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to a process other than the first special symbol normal process. can be determined by If the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS1126B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 080IWS1127B). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 080IWS1128B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1129B).

When it is determined as Y in step 080IWS1125B and when it is determined as Y in step 080IWS1126B, after starting the variation display of the second special symbol as the final variation in the low probability/high base state (1st KT state), the variation display is ended. This is the case where the variable display of the first special symbol has started before. In this case, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 080IWS1127B to S1129B, after starting the variation display of the second special symbol as the final variation in the low probability/high base state (first KT state), the variation display , the lighting extension flag is reset at the timing of the start of the variable display of the first special symbol to end the low probability/high base state. and then transition to the low-probability/low-base state (normal state).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A is deriving and displaying the jackpot symbol (step 080IWS1130B). Whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing, It can be determined by confirming whether or not a first big hit flag indicating that a big hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol is set.

If the first special symbol display device 4A does not derive and display the big winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A derives and displays the small winning symbol (step 080IWS1131B). Whether or not the small winning symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not a first small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol is set. If the first special symbol display device 4A does not derive and display the small winning symbol, the process is terminated as it is.

If the first special symbol display device 4A is deriving and displaying a small winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol being executed will result in a big winning (step 080IWS1132B). . It should be noted that whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol being executed will result in a big win can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second big win flag is set. If the variation display of the second special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variation display of the second special symbol being executed becomes a jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot (first variable jackpot to third jackpot) (step 080IWS1133B). ). Whether or not it is a variable probability big hit (first variable probability big hit to third variable probability big hit) can be determined, for example, by confirming the type of big win stored in step 080IWS63B. If it is a probability variable jackpot (first probability variable jackpot to third probability variable jackpot), the process is terminated as it is.

When the big hit pattern is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (Y of step 080IWS1130B), or when the small winning pattern is derived and displayed (Y of step 080IWS1131B) and the probability variable jackpot (first probability variable jackpot to second 3 probability variable jackpot) (that is, a normal jackpot) is being executed (Y in step 080IWS1132B, N in step 080IWS1133B), the CPU 103 instructs the effect control CPU 120 to 2 Perform control to transmit a compulsory pattern determination designation command (step 080IWS1134B). In this case, if the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 080IWS1135B).

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS1130B to S1134B, in this characteristic part 080IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, or when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit. When the variable display of the second special pattern, which usually results in a big hit, is being executed, the variable display of the second special pattern is forcibly stopped, and the first special pattern and the second special pattern simultaneously hit the jackpot. We are trying to prevent situations where small hits occur. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the second special symbol variation display is forced out, the decoration symbol variation is based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted at step 080IWS 1134B. As a result of the display, control is performed so as to forcibly stop and display the lost pattern.

In this example, it is the case that the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes the probability variable big hit is being executed. In some cases, the second special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see Y in step 080IWS1133B). The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the process shifts to the small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, step 080IWS1120B is determined as N, steps 080IWS1121B to S1135B are skipped, and step 080IWS1122B does not update the second variable time timer. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol which becomes a probability variable big hit is being executed, the second variation time timer is set during the small winning game. is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, it is a case where the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit. If there is, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 080IWS1132B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol results in a small win and the variation display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or a small win is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small win game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and the small winning game is finished, the update of the second variable time timer is resumed.

By constructing as described above, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time saving state), the remaining second reserved memory can be digested, and the occurrence of a big hit at unintended timing when the player is absent. can be suppressed.

In addition, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first start winning hole), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol ( A game machine configured to provide a starting winning hole which is not a variable winning ball device, and configured to shift to a normal state via a time saving state of a first special pattern after the end of a second KT state (small winning RUSH). , As described above, a configuration may be applied in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forced out. In this case, since the variation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of occurrence of small hits based on the variation display of the first special symbol also increases. To further suppress the occurrence of a big hit at an unintended timing in the absence of a player by increasing the frequency of playing, suppressing the occurrence of the variable display of the second special pattern based on the second reserved memory in the normal state. can be done.

(Second special symbol stop processing)
9-16 and 9-17 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 080IWS2010B). If the variable probability flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the variable probability storage flag (step 080IWS2011B). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag or lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS2012B). If the high base flag or lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the high base storage flag (step 080IWS2013B).

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS2010B to S2013B, in this example, it is temporarily recorded that the game state at the end of the variable display was the probability variable state or the high base state.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS2014B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag (step 080IWS2015B). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 080IWS2016B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2017B).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who performed the right-handed operation is in favor of the player and the hit-right indicator 26 is illuminated. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit during the low probability/first KT state, but by executing the processing of steps 080IWS67B to S73B, the second special symbol is displayed as the 50th variation display. It is determined to end the low probability/first KT state when starting the variable display, and the processing of steps 080IWS2014B to S2017B is executed, so that when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished, the low probability/second After finishing the 1KT state and shifting to the normal state (non-KT state), the right-handed indicator 26 is extinguished. However, as already explained, by executing the processing of steps 080IWS1125B to S1129B, after starting the variation display of the second special symbol as the final variation in the low probability/first KT state, before ending the variation display If the variable display of the first special symbol is started at the beginning of the variable display of the first special symbol, the low probability/high base state is terminated at the timing of the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the low probability/low base state (normal state ).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 080IWS2018B). In this case, if the second compulsory design confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 080IWS1134B of the second special design variation process, regardless of the determination result at the start of variation, the second special design is forced as a stop design. Derivation and display of the target missing pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second big hit flag is set (step 080IWS2019B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 080IWS2020B). Also, the CPU 103 clears the second big hit flag (step 080IWS2021B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 080IWS2022B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2023B). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2032B.

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS2022B and S2023B, in this example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started when a big win is achieved in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big win game. , and the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

If the second jackpot flag is not set (N of step 080IWS2019B), the CPU 103 resets the variable probability memory flag and high base memory flag (step 080IWS2024B). In this example, the processing of steps 080IWS2010B to S2013B is executed to set the probability variable storage flag and the high base storage flag, and once the game state at the end of the variable display was the variable probability state or the high base state is recorded. However, in the case of deriving and displaying a winning symbol or a small winning symbol, the process of step 080IWS2024B is executed to reset the probability variable storage flag and high base storage flag.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 080IWS2025B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2026B). Also, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 080IWS2027B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 080IWS2028B). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right hitting indicator 26 (step 080IWS2029B), and the right for the effect control CPU 120 Control is performed to transmit a lighting start designation command (step 080IWS2030B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning opening pre-processing (step 080IWS2031B). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2032B.

By executing the processes of steps 080IWS2029B and S2030B, in this example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is better for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small winning game. Advantageously, the hit right indicator 26 is lit.

However, in this example, even if a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 should already be on during the KT state. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination processing of step 080IWS2028B, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the lighting of the right hand indicator 26 is started in duplicate. or a right-handed lighting start designation command is not performed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 080IWS2032B).

(Accessory control normal processing)
FIG. 9-18 is a flow chart showing a role product control normal process (step S120) in the role product control process process. In the role product control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot start flag is set (step 080IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process is terminated as it is.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 080IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step 080IWS2103), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the jackpot type (step 080IWS2104), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot to "1". ' is set (step 080IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 080IWS2106).

(Gate passage waiting process)
FIG. 9-19 is a flow chart showing the gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate switch 21 (step 080IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is not input, the process is terminated. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103, if set, resets the probability variation flag, high base flag, special figure time saving flag, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 ( step 080 IWS 2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 080IWS2503), and sets the value of the role control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step 080IWS2504).

In this characteristic portion 080IW, the passage gate 41 is played instead of immediately starting the jackpot game when the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the second special pattern by executing the gate passage waiting process. On the condition that the ball passes and is detected by the gate switch 21, it is configured to shift to a big hit game.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIGS. 9-20 and 9-21 are flowcharts showing the jackpot ending process (step S125) in the role control process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 080IWS2200), and when the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2202. When the big win end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the big win end display timer to display time corresponding to the time (big win end display time) during which the big win end display is performed on the image display device 5. A value is set (step 080IWS2201), and the process ends.

At step 080IWS2202, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer (step 080IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 080IWS2203). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 080IWS2203), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that ended this time is the normal jackpot (step 080IWS2204). Incidentally, whether or not it is a normal jackpot can be determined by confirming the jackpot type stored in step 080IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 080IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process, for example. If it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 080IWS2205), sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 080IWS2206). Also, the CPU 103 sets the high base number counter to "50" (step 080IWS2207). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, in the case of a normal jackpot, the game is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

If it is not the normal jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that ended this time is the first variable probability jackpot (step 080IWS2208). It should be noted that whether or not the first probability variable jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step 080IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 080IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is the first variable probability big hit, the CPU 103 sets the variable probability flag and shifts to the variable probability state (step 080IWS2209), sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 080IWS2210).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability storage flag is set (step 080IWS2211). If the variable probability storage flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base storage flag is set (step 080IWS2212). If the high base memory flag is not set (N of step 080IWS2212), that is, if the low probability/low base state is set at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, the high base flag is set to shift to the high base state. (Step 080IWS2213), and "100" is set in the high base frequency counter (Step 080IWS2214). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, in the case of the low probability/low base state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, when the first probability variable jackpot is obtained, the control is performed to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and then, After 100 times of fluctuation display, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is controlled to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state).

If the high base memory flag is set (Y in step 080IWS2212), that is, if it is in the low probability/high base state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, the high base flag is set and the state is shifted to the high base state. (Step 080IWS2215) and "50" is set in the high base frequency counter (Step 080IWS2216). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, when the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed in the low probability/high base state and the first probability variable jackpot is achieved, the control is performed to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and then, After 50 times of fluctuation display, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is controlled to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state).

If the variable probability storage flag is set (Y of step 080IWS2211), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base storage flag is set (step 080IWS2217). If the high base storage flag is set (Y in step 080IWS2217), that is, if the high probability/high base state is set at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, the high base flag is set to shift to the high base state. (Step 080IWS2218), and set "50" in the high base frequency counter (Step 080IWS2219). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, in the case of the high probability/high base state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, when the first probability variable jackpot is obtained, the control is performed to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and then, After 50 times of fluctuation display, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is controlled to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state).

On the other hand, if the high base memory flag is not set (N of step 080IWS2217), that is, if the high probability/low base state is set at the time of derivation display of the jackpot symbol, the process proceeds directly to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, when the high probability / low base state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern becomes the first probability variable jackpot, without going through the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), It is immediately controlled to the high-probability/low base state (high-probability/second KT state).

If it is not the first variable probability jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that ended this time is the second variable probability jackpot (step 080IWS2220). It should be noted that whether or not the second probability variable jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step 080IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 080IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is the second probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the probability variable flag and shifts to the probability variable state (step 080IWS2221), sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 080IWS2222).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability storage flag is set (step 080IWS2223). If the variable probability storage flag is not set (N of step 080 IWS2223), that is, if the low probability/low base state or low probability/high base state is set at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, the high base flag is set. It shifts to the high base state (step 080IWS2224) and sets "50" in the high base frequency counter (step 080IWS2225). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, when the derivation display of the jackpot pattern is in the low probability/low base state or the low probability/high base state, if the second probability variable jackpot occurs, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state ), and after 50 times of fluctuation display, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is controlled to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state).

On the other hand, if the variable probability storage flag is set (Y in step 080IWS2223), that is, if the high probability/high base state or high probability/low base state is present at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. do. Therefore, when the high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state at the time of the derivation display of the jackpot pattern, if the second probability variable jackpot occurs, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state ), the state is immediately controlled to the high-probability/low base state (high-probability/second KT state).

If it is not the second probability variation jackpot (that is, if the third probability variation jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (step 080IWS2226), and sets the special figure time saving flag to the KT state. Transition (step 080IWS2227). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, regardless of the game state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, when the third probability variable jackpot is achieved, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is not passed immediately. It is controlled to a low base state (high probability/second KT state).

Next, the CPU 103 resets the variable probability storage flag and high base storage flag if they are set (step 080IWS2228). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the normal role product control process (step 080IWS2229).

(small hit end processing)
FIG. 9-22 is a flow chart showing a small hit end process (step S128) in the role product control process process. In the small-hit end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small-hit end display timer is set (step 080IWS2300), and when the small-hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2302. When the small-hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 causes the small-hit end display timer to display corresponding to the time during which the small-hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small-hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 080IWS2301), and the process ends.

At step 080IWS2302, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer (step 080IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small-hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small-hit end display time has elapsed (step 080IWS2303). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the small hit end display time has passed (Y of step 080IWS2303), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 080IWS2304). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 checks whether the right-handed indicator 26 is lit (step 080IWS2305). If the right-handed indicator 26 is lit, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 080IWS2306), and transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 080IWS2307).

In this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the lighting of the right hand indicator 26 is started at the start of the small win game (steps 080IWS2028B-S2030B). ), by executing the processing of steps 080IWS2304 to S2307, the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 ends at the end of the small winning game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the normal role product control process (step 080IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the game state in this characteristic portion 080IW will be described. FIG. 9-23 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of game states controlled after the jackpot game for each jackpot type. Also, FIG. 9-24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the game state transitions in this characteristic portion 080IW.

As shown in FIG. 9-23, in the case of a normal jackpot, regardless of the game state when the jackpot symbols are derived and displayed, the game is controlled to a low-probability/high-base state (first KT state) after the jackpot game. When the variable display is finished, the low-probability/high-base state (first KT state) is finished and the low-probability/low-base state (normal state) is entered (see steps 080IWS2205 to S2207).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-23, in the case of the first variable probability jackpot, if the low probability/low base state (normal state) at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, high probability/high probability after the jackpot game It is controlled to the base state (1st KT state), and after that, when 100 times of fluctuation display is completed, it is controlled from the high probability/high base state (1st KT state) to the high probability/low base state (2nd KT state) ( See step 080 IWS2209 to S2214).

Also, as shown in Figure 9-23, when the first probability variable jackpot is reached, in the low probability / high base state (1st KT state) or high probability / high base state (1KT state) at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern If there is, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (1st KT state) after the jackpot game, and after that, when the fluctuation display is completed 50 times, the high probability/high base state (1st KT state) is changed to a high probability/ It is controlled to the low base state (second KT state) (see steps 080IWS2209-S2212, S2215, S2216, S2217-S2219).

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-23, in the case of the first probability variable jackpot, if the high probability / low base state (second KT state) at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, the high probability / high base state Without going through the (1st KT state), it is immediately controlled to the high probability/low base state (2nd KT state) after the big hit game (see steps 080IWS2209 to S2211, S2217).

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the second probability variable jackpot is reached, in the low probability / low base state (1st KT state) or low probability / high base state (1KT state) at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern If there is, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (1st KT state) after the jackpot game, and after that, when the fluctuation display is completed 50 times, the high probability/high base state (1st KT state) is changed to a high probability/ It is controlled to the low base state (second KT state) (see steps 080IWS2221 to S2225).

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the second probability variable jackpot is reached, in the high probability / high base state (1st KT state) or high probability / low base state (2nd KT state) at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern If there is, it is controlled to the high probability/low base state (second KT state) immediately after the jackpot game without going through the high probability/high base state (first KT state) (see steps 080IWS2221 to S2223).

As shown in FIG. 9-23, when the third probability variable jackpot is reached, the jackpot game is played without passing through the high probability / high base state (first KT state) regardless of the game state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern. After that, it is immediately controlled to the high probability/low base state (second KT state) (see steps 080IWS2226-S2227).

In this example, when the third probability variable jackpot is achieved, the case is shown in which control is immediately made to the high probability/low base state (second KT state) regardless of the game state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot symbols. , is not limited to such aspects. For example, even in the case of the third probability variable jackpot, if the game state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern is in the low probability/low base state (normal state), once the high probability/high base state (first KT state), and then transition to the high-probability/low-base state (second KT state) based on completion of a predetermined number of times (eg, 50 times) of variable display.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the game state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern is the high probability/low base state (second KT state), the first variable jackpot or the second Even in the case of a variable probability big hit, it is immediately controlled to a high probability/low base state (second KT state), and by configuring in this way, a high probability/low base state (second KT state (small hit RUSH)) can be achieved. It is possible to prevent disappointment about the end of That is, even during the high-probability/low base state (second KT state), the first special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner. The probability that the high probability/low base state (second KT state (small hit RUSH)) may end due to the high determination ratio of the probability variable big win and the second probability variable big win may give the player a feeling of uneasiness. There is Therefore, in this example, in the case of high probability / low base state (second KT state), control to high probability / low base state (second KT state) immediately even if it becomes the first variable probability big hit or the second variable probability big hit It is configured so as to prevent such a disappointment from being given to the player.

In this characteristic portion 080IW, in the low-probability/low-base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player shoots the game ball (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting winning to the first starting winning opening mainly occurs, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-24, when the 3rd probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). , the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 080IWS2226-S2227). However, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the percentage of the third probability variable jackpot is only 5%, which is low. In addition, when the first variable probability big win or the second variable probability big win occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the big win game ends, the state is shifted to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and then The high-probability/high-base state is maintained until a big hit occurs or the 50th or 100th variation display is completed (see steps 080IWS2209-S2214, S2221-2225). In addition, when a normal big win occurs in the low probability/low base state, the transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) is made after the end of the big win game, and whether the next big win occurs or not. The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the variable display is completed (see steps 080IWS2205 to S2207).

After transitioning to the KT state (high-probability/high-base state, low-probability/high-base state, high-probability/low-base state), in this characteristic portion 080IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. to perform the shooting operation (right hitting) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning to the second start winning opening is mainly generated, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-24, when the second probability variable big hit or the third probability variable big hit occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/low probability It shifts to the base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 080IWS2221-S2223, S2226-S2227). In addition, when the first variable-probability jackpot occurs in the high-probability/high-base state (high-probability/first KT state), the transition to the high-probability/high-base state (high-probability/first KT state) occurs after the jackpot game ends. Then, the high-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is completed (see steps 080IWS2209-S2211, S2217-S2219). Further, when a normal jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), the state is shifted to a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the jackpot game ends, The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50 times variation display is completed (see steps 080IW080IWS2205-S2207). Also, in this example, in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), even if the fluctuation display ends 50 times or 100 times without the occurrence of the next big hit, the high probability/low base It shifts to the state (high probability/second KT state) (see steps 080IWS67A-S71A, S67B-S71B).

As shown in FIG. 9-24, when the third probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 080IWS2226-S2227). In addition, when the first probability variable jackpot or the second probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/high base state (high probability/second 1KT state), and the high-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or 50 fluctuation displays are completed (see steps 080IWS2209-S2212, S2215, S2216, S2221-S2225). Further, when a normal jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), after the jackpot game ends, the state is shifted to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is completed (see steps 080IWS2205 to S2207). After the normal jackpot occurs and the low-probability/high-base state is reached, if the fluctuation display ends 50 times without the next jackpot occurring, as shown in FIG. It shifts to the probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 080IWS67A-S72A, S67B-S72B).

As shown in FIG. 9-24, in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), when the first high probability big hit, the second high probability big hit, or the third high probability big hit occurs, the big hit game After the end, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (steps 080IWS2209-S2211, S2217, S2221-S2223, S2226 to S2227). Further, when a normal jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), after the jackpot game ends, the state is shifted to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is completed (see steps 080IWS2205 to S2207).

In addition, in FIG. 9-24, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) has been described, but the second special symbol changes at a low rate It is also possible that a display is performed. Also, in FIG. 9-24, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. may be executed. Also, in FIG. 9-24, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. may be executed. Also, in FIG. 9-24, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. may be executed.

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 9-25 is a flow chart showing a specific example of the effect control main processing in the characteristic portion 080IW. In FIG. 9-25, the processing of steps 080IWS201-S205 is the same as the processing of steps S71-S75 shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first small symbol process (step 080IWS206). In this example, by executing the first small symbol process processing of step 080IWS206, in the image display device 5, apart from the variable display of the decorative symbol, the first small symbol is displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second small symbol process (step 080IWS207). In this example, by executing the second small symbol process processing of step 080IWS207, the image display device 5 displays the second small symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, separately from the variable display of the decorative symbol. is executed.

In this example, the small patterns (the first small pattern and the second small pattern) are smaller in display size than the decorative patterns, and are difficult to see when compared with the decorative patterns. Further, in this example, when the pseudo-run is executed, the pseudo-running chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed once in the variable display of the decoration symbols, and then the re-variation is executed once or more to execute the variable display again. However, as for the variable display of the small symbols, the variable display of the small symbols is continuously executed without temporary stop display or re-variation even when the pseudo-run is executed. Further, in this example, as will be described later, during the variable display of the special symbols, there is a case where a shutter effect for displaying a shutter image on the image display device 5 is executed. As for the variable display of the small symbols, it continues to be visually recognizable even during execution of the shutter effect. Also, while the shutter effect is being executed, the decoration pattern and the reserved display are in a non-display state. is executed.

FIG. 9-26 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of stop symbols of the small symbols (first small symbol, second small symbol). As shown in FIG. 9-26, in this example, when a big hit is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbols, the symbol combination (big hit symbol) of "333" is stop-displayed as the stop symbol of the first small symbols. be. Further, when a big win is achieved in the variable display of the second special symbols, the symbol combination of "777" (big hit symbol) is stop-displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbols.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-26, in this example, when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, the symbol combination of "765" as the stop symbol of the first small symbol (small winning symbol). appears stopped. Further, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbols, the symbol combination of "765" (small winning symbol) is stop-displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbols.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-26, in this example, when the non-reach is lost in the variable display of the first special symbol, the symbol combination of "123" (non-reach) is used as the stop symbol of the first small symbol. Lost symbol) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the first special symbols are displayed in a variable display, the symbol combination of "323" (ready-to-win symbols) is stop-displayed as the stop symbol of the first small symbols. Further, when the non-ready-to-win is lost in the variable display of the second special symbols, the symbol combination of "567" (non-ready-to-be-lost) is stop-displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol. In addition, when the ready-to-win is lost in the variable display of the second special symbols, the symbol combination of "767" (ready-to-win lost symbol) is stop-displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbols.

Next, the processing of step 080IWS208 is the same as the processing of step S76 shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process (step 080IWS209). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process in step 080IWS209, in the image display device 5, apart from the variable display of the decorative symbols and the small symbols (the first and second small symbols), the special symbol In synchronism with the variable display of , the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed.

In this example, when the pseudo-run is executed, the pseudo-running chance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed again in the variable display of the decoration symbols, and then the re-variation is performed once or more times. However, regarding the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the small symbols is continuously executed without temporary stop display or re-variation even when the pseudo-run is executed. Further, in this example, as will be described later, during the variable display of the special symbols, there is a case where a shutter effect for displaying a shutter image on the image display device 5 is executed. As for the variable display of the fourth symbol, it continues to be visually recognizable even during execution of the shutter effect. Also, while the shutter effect is being executed, the decoration pattern and the reserved display are in a non-display state, but regardless of whether or not the decorative pattern and the reserved display are in the non-display state, the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed. be.

Next, the processing of step 080IWS210 is the same as the processing of step S77 shown in FIG.

(Command analysis processing)
9-27 to 9-30 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step 080IWS205). The production control command received from the main substrate 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 080IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. The case where the two match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the command reception buffer stores the reception command, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 080IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 080IWS613). The reason for incrementing by 2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 080IWS614), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 080IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 080IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 080IWS617). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 080IWS618).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step 080IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 080IWS620 ).

If the received effect control command is any of the design determination designation commands (first design determination designation command, second design determination designation command, first compulsory design determination designation command, second compulsory design determination designation command) (step 080IWS621 ), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 080IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first compulsory design determination designation command is received, the first compulsory determination command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second compulsory design determination designation command is received, the second compulsory determination command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 080IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 080IWS624). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 080IWS625).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 080IWS626). In this example, as will be described later, when not informing of hitting to the right (for example, during low probability / low base state (normal state)), the variable display of the decorative design is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special design. Then, when the right-handed notification is in progress (for example, during the KT state), the variable display of the decoration design is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special design. Therefore, even if the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the big hit is achieved when the right-handed notification is being performed, or even when the second special symbol is displayed variationally, the right-handed notification is not being performed. In this case (hereinafter referred to as an irregular jackpot), the variable display of the decorative symbols is not executed. If the value of the performance control process flag is a value corresponding to the special prize waiting process (Y of step 080IWS626), that is, if it is not an irregular jackpot, the process proceeds directly to step 080IWS611.

If the value of the effect control process flag does not correspond to the special figure winning process (N of step 080IWS626), it means that the game is an irregular jackpot and the variable display of decorative symbols is not executed. In this case, as will be described later, since the shutter performance is being executed in the event of an irregular jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to terminate the shutter performance (step 080IWS627).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the big hit (step 080IWS628). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 080IWS629), the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts) is executed (step 080IWS630).

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S176) during the big hit (step 080IWS631).

In this example, in the case of a normal jackpot that is not irregular, control is performed to start displaying the number of prize balls at the start of the jackpot game (see steps 080IWS9711 and S9712), but in the case of an irregular jackpot. may also be configured to start displaying the number of winning balls.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 080IWS632), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 080IWS633). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 080IWS634).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 080IWS624 and S633, a right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 080IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step 080IWS636).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 080IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step 080IWS638).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 080IWS639), the production control CPU 120 sets a right-handed lighting flag indicating that the right-handed notification is performed (step 063IWS640). Control is performed to start the lighting of the striking notification LED 37 (step 080IWS641). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to replace the decoration pattern displayed on the image display device 5 with the same pattern as the second small pattern and display it (step 080IWS642).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 080IWS643), the production control CPU 120 resets the right-handed lighting flag (step 063IWS644), and the production control CPU 120 uses the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 080IWS645).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the image display device 5 is in a state in which the jackpot symbol (in this example, a combination of "333" symbols) is stopped and displayed as the first small symbol ( step 080 IWS 646). If the jackpot pattern is not stopped and displayed as the first small pattern, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to replace the decoration pattern displayed on the image display device 5 with the same pattern as the first small pattern and display it. (step 080IWS647). If the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first small symbol, the effect control CPU 120 causes the decorative symbol displayed on the image display device 5 to be displayed as the initial symbol (in this example, the symbol "135"). combination) and display (step 080IWS648).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 resets the prize ball number counter for counting the number of prize balls (step 080IWS649).

In this example, by executing the process of step 080IWS649, the value of the number-of-balls counter is reset at the timing when the right-handed lighting end designation command is received and the left-handed operation is started. Therefore, in this example, when the right-handed lighting start designation command is first received and the right-handed operation is started, counting of the value of the prize ball number counter is started, and when the right-handed lighting end designation command is received, left-handed hitting is started. At the timing when the operation is started, the counting of the value of the number-of-balls counter is ended.

If the received effect control command is a low probability/non-KT background designation command (step 080IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability/non-KT state (for example, A blue background image) is displayed (step 080IWS651). Also, if the effect control CPU 120 is set, it resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 080IWS652).

If the received effect control command is a low probability/first KT background designation command (step 080IWS653), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability/first KT state (for example, A green background image) is displayed (step 080IWS654). In addition, the effect control CPU120 sets the first KT state flag (step 080IWS655), and if it is set, a high probability state flag indicating a high probability state and a second KT state flag indicating a second KT state. Reset the 2KT status flag (step 080IWS656).

If the received effect control command is a high probability/first KT background designation command (step 080IWS657), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability/first KT state (for example, A yellow background image) is controlled (step 080IWS658). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high-probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 080IWS659), and if set, resets the second KT state flag (step 080IWS660).

If the received effect control command is a high probability/second KT background designation command (step 080IWS661), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability/second KT state (for example, A red background image) is controlled (step 080IWS662). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high-probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 080IWS663), and if set, resets the first KT state flag (step 080IWS664).

If the received effect control command is a big winning opening winning designation command (step 080IWS665), the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the winning ball counter (step 080IWS666). Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to update the display of the number of prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the counter for the number of prize balls after addition (step 080IWS667).

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 080IWS668), it is checked whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS669). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the prize ball number counter (step 080IWS670). Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to update the display of the number of prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the counter for the number of prize balls after addition (step 080IWS671).

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS668 to S671, in this example, in addition to the case where the winning to the big winning opening occurs during the big winning game, the special winning opening is won in the small winning game state in the second KT state. The display of the number of prize balls is also updated when

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command, or executes a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 080IWS672 ). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS611.

(variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 9-31 is a flow chart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a variation pattern command is received (step 080IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step 080IWS205). Then, in step 080IWS811, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the flag during right-handed lighting is set (step 080IWS812). If the right-handed lighting flag is not set (that is, if the left-handed operation is performed instead of the right-handed notification), the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the first special symbol. It is checked whether it is the case (step 080IWS813). It should be noted that whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation pattern #01 to #12 It can be determined by checking whether If the variable display of the first special symbol is not to be executed (that is, if the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed), the process is terminated as it is. In the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the process proceeds to step 080IWS815.

If the right-handed lighting flag is set (that is, if the right-handed operation is being performed during the right-handed notification), the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the second special symbol. It is checked whether it is the case (step 080IWS814). It should be noted that whether or not to execute the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command designates the second variation pattern #01 to #34 It can be determined by checking whether If the variable display of the second special symbol is not to be executed (that is, if the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed), the process is terminated as it is. In the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the process proceeds to step 080IWS815.

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS812 to S814, in the characteristic part 080IW, when the left-handed operation is being performed, the image display device 5 displays the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the variable display of the first special design. is executed, and when the right-handed operation is being performed, the variable display of the decorative design is executed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the second special design. In other words, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the right-handed operation is in progress, and even if the second special symbol is varied-displayed, the left-handed operation is in progress. In that case, the variable display of the decoration pattern is not executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 080IWS815). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 080IWS815. Now, check whether the flag is set or not.

If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the shutter effect (step 080IWS816). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to restart the display of the decorative symbols and the pending display on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS817).

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS815 to S817, in this example, when performing the shutter effect in the variation display of the decoration symbol of the loss variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, the second If the variable display of the second special symbol is not started, after the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, the shutter performance is terminated at the timing when the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started, and the decorative symbol and the pending display are displayed. Display resumes. In addition, when executing the shutter performance in the variation display of the decoration pattern of the losing variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, if the variation display of the first special symbol is not started on the way, the second After finishing the variable display of the special pattern, the shutter effect is finished at the timing when the variable display of the next decorative pattern is started, and the display of the decorative pattern and the reserved display is resumed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is the variation pattern for the shutter effect (step 080IWS818). Specifically, it confirms whether or not any of the second variation patterns #14 to #16 is specified. If it is a variation pattern for shutter effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the shutter effect in the image display device 5 (step 080IWS819). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for erasing the decorative symbols and reserved display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS820).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 080IWS821).

When it is not the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol in step 080 IWS814, that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but in the case of right-handed notification, an irregular jackpot. A shutter effect start process 1, which is a process for starting the shutter effect of , is executed (step 080IWS822). In this example, in the case of an irregular jackpot, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but there are the cases of right-handed notification and the variable display of the second special symbol. However, the shutter effect start processing 1 is a case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but when the right hit is being reported, the control to start the shutter effect is performed. This is the process to be performed.

Further, in this example, when the 50th variation display of the low probability/high base state (1st KT state) is completed, the control is performed to the low probability/low base state (normal state). Since it is in the high base state (1st KT state), the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation display, and the low probability/low base state (normal state) is controlled. However, there is a case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed irregularly as the 50th variable variable display and is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state). It will appear to be suddenly controlled to a low-probability/low-base state (normal state) without being executed. In this example, the shutter effect is started by executing the shutter effect start process 1 even when such an irregular fiftieth variation display is executed.

If it is not the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol in step 080 IWS813, that is, the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, but if it is not during the notification of hitting to the right, the case of an irregular jackpot is determined. A shutter effect start process 2, which is a process for starting a shutter effect, is executed (step 080IWS832). In addition, the shutter effect start process 2 is a process for performing control to start the shutter effect when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed but when the right hitting notification is not in progress.

FIG. 9-32(A) is a flow chart showing the shutter effect start process 1 (step 080IWS822). In the shutter effect start process 1, the effect control CPU 120 first determines that the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command is the first variation pattern for the big hit (first variation patterns #05, #06, #09, #12). (Step 080IWS501). If it is the first variation pattern for the jackpot (that is, if it is an irregular jackpot), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the current gaming state is a low probability/high base state (step 080IWS502). Whether or not the low probability/high base state can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the high probability state flag is turned off and only the first KT state flag is set (step 080IWS655). reference). In the low probability/high base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the normal/time saving shutter effect in the image display device 5 (step 080IWS503). It should be noted that during execution of the normal/time-saving shutter effect, the decoration pattern and the pending display may be deleted.

If not in the low probability/high base state, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the current game state is in the high probability/high base state (step 080IWS504). It should be noted that whether or not the high probability/high base state can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag are set (see step 080IWS659). If it is in the high probability/high base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the shutter effect for the high probability/high base state in the image display device 5 (step 080IWS505). It should be noted that during execution of the shutter effect for the high probability/high base state, the decoration pattern and the pending display may be deleted.

If it is not the high probability/high base state, it means that the current game state is the high probability/low base state. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the shutter effect for the small hit RUSH in the image display device 5 (step 080IWS506). It should be noted that during the execution of the shutter effect for small hit RUSH, it may be configured to erase the decoration pattern and the pending display.

If it is not the first variation pattern for the big hit, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command is the first variation pattern #7, #8 (step 080IWS507). If the first variation patterns #7 and #8 (that is, if the 50th variation display in the low probability / high base state is executed), the effect control CPU 120 ends the time saving in the image display device 5 Control is performed to start the shutter effect for time (step 080IWS508). It should be noted that during the execution of the shutter effect for time saving end, the decoration pattern and the pending display may be deleted.

FIG. 9-32B is a flow chart showing the shutter effect start process 2 (step 080IWS823). In the shutter effect start process 2, the effect control CPU 120 first determines that the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command is the second variation pattern for the big hit (first variation patterns #03, #06, #13, #16, #21, #28, #34) (step 080IWS511). If it is the second variation pattern for the jackpot (that is, if it is an irregular jackpot), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the normal/shortening shutter effect (step 080IWS512 ). It should be noted that during execution of the normal/time-saving shutter effect, the decoration pattern and the pending display may be deleted.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 9-33 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the right-handed lighting flag is set (step 080IWS920). If the right-handed lighting flag is not set (that is, if the left-handed operation is being performed instead of the right-handed notification), the effect control CPU 120 selects the first small as the decorative design stop design. A combination of the same symbols as the stop symbol of the first small symbol determined in the symbol process (step 080IWS206) is determined (step 080IWS921). If the right-handed lighting flag is set (that is, if the right-handed hitting operation is being performed during the right-handed notification), the effect control CPU 120 selects the second small as the decorative design stop design. A combination of the same symbols as the stop symbol of the second small symbol determined in the symbol process (step 080IWS207) is determined (step 080IWS922).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the change display of this time is a loss (step 080IWS923). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of this time is a failure can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. can be determined by If it is not an outlier change, the process proceeds directly to step 080IWS927. If it is a deviation change (Y in step 080IWS923), the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting value suggesting effect setting process for determining the presence or absence and type of a set value suggesting effect suggesting the currently set value. (Step 080 IWS 924).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS925). If the 2KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the 2KT state), the process proceeds directly to step 080IWS927. If the second KT state flag is set (Y of step 080IWS925), that is, if it is the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 is a small hit RUSH suggesting that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence and type of continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 080IWS926).

Next, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, when determining the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used, and the execution of the set value suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect , selects a process table corresponding to the setting value suggestion effect or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect (step 080IWS927).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected at step 080IWS927 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 080IWS928). Next, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 080IWS929). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the LED control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

However, in this example, when the shutter effect is executed, the decorative pattern is hidden, so the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed (small patterns (first small pattern, second small pattern), The variable display of the fourth symbol is executed).

Incidentally, when it is decided to execute the setting value suggesting effect, step 080IWS929 and variable display effect processing (step S172) are executed in accordance with the process table including the set value suggesting effect selected in step 080IWS927. The setting value suggesting effect is executed while the pattern is being displayed in a variable manner (during the deviation variation).

In addition, when execution of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production is decided, step 080IWS929 and production processing during variable display (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small win RUSH continuation suggestion production selected in step 080IWS927. By doing so, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is executed during the variable display of the decoration pattern (during the deviation variation during the second KT state).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time to the decoration design variation time timer and starts the decoration design variation time timer (step 080IWS930). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 080IWS931).

(Effect processing during variable display)
FIGS. 9-34 and 9-35 are flowcharts showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 080IWS8101) and also subtracts 1 from the value of the decoration symbol fluctuation time timer (step 080IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 080IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 080IWS8104). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data which are set next (step 080IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the right-handed lighting flag is set (step 080IWS8106). If the right-handed lighting flag is not set (that is, if the left-handed operation is performed instead of the right-handed notification), the effect control CPU 120 receives the first symbol confirmation designation command. It is confirmed whether or not (for example, whether or not the first fixed command reception flag is set) (step 080IWS8107). If the first symbol determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 080IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command is not received, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received (for example, whether or not the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set). (step 080IWS8108). If the first compulsory design determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs processing to replace the stop design of the decorative design determined in step 080IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with the lost design (step 080IWS8109). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 080IWS8110).

If the right-handed lighting flag is set in step 080IWS8106 (that is, if the right-handed operation is being performed during the right-handed notification), the effect control CPU 120 issues the second symbol confirmation designation command. It is checked whether or not it has been received (for example, whether or not the second fixed command reception flag is set) (step 080IWS8111). If the second symbol determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 080IWS8114).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command is not received, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received (for example, whether or not the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set). (step 080IWS8112). If the second compulsory design determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs processing to replace the stop design of the decorative design determined in step 080IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with the lost design (step 080IWS8113). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 080IWS8114).

When the first compulsory pattern confirmation designation command is not received at step 080IWS8108, or when the second compulsory design confirmation designation command is not received at step 080IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 is executing the shutter effect. (step 080IWS8115). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined, for example, by setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 080IWS8115. Now, check whether the flag is set or not.

If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display being executed is the big hit variation (step 080IWS8116). If it is not a big hit variation (that is, if it is a losing variation or a small winning variation), the effect control CPU 120 is that the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed corresponds to the variation display of the first special symbol. (Step 080IWS8117). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the decoration symbol being executed is executed in correspondence with the variable display of the first special symbol is determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the right-handed lighting flag is set. can be determined by

If the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol has been started. (step 080IWS8118). Whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol has started can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not a variation pattern command designating the second variation patterns #01 to #34 has been received. If the variable display of the second special symbol is not started, the process proceeds directly to step 080IWS8122.

If the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed does not correspond to the variable display of the first special design, that is, the variable display of the decorative design being executed does not correspond to the variable display of the second special design. If so, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is started (step 080IWS8119). Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol has started can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not a variation pattern command designating the first variation patterns #01 to #12 has been received. If the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, the process proceeds directly to step 080IWS8122.

If the variable display of the decoration symbol being executed is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is started (Y of step 080IWS8118), or if the variable display of the second special symbol is started The variable display of the decorative design is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special design, and when the variable display of the first special design is started (Y in step 080IWS8119), the effect control CPU 120 , the image display device 5 is controlled to end the shutter effect (step 080IWS8120). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for resuming display of decorative symbols and reserved display on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS8121).

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS8115 to S8121, in this example, when executing the shutter production in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the loss variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, the second When the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the shutter performance is terminated at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, and the display of the decoration symbol and the reserved display is resumed. In addition, when executing the shutter performance in the variation display of the decoration pattern of the loss variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the way, that At the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the shutter performance is ended, and the display of the decorative symbol and the reserved display is resumed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out (step 080IWS8122). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to process data for standby effect (step 080IWS8123). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 080IWS8124).

In this example, as already explained, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit, and when the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, or a probability variable big hit, is being executed. During the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit, and when the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, or a probability variable big hit, is being executed, during the small winning game. , the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decorative design variable time timer timed out in step 080IWS8122 without receiving any of the design determination designation commands means that the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted in this way, and the first This is the case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 080IWS8123 and S8124, the effect is switched to the standby effect. The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol ends. Note that the "standby effect" is, for example, a temporary stop state effect in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns on the image display device 5 are shaken or slightly fluctuated.

In this example, the small patterns (first small pattern, second small pattern) and fourth pattern are also variably displayed on the image display device 5. However, the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer When the update is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these small symbols (first small symbol, second small symbol) and the fourth symbol is also performed. Executes continuously. Then, when the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is resumed and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these small symbols (first small symbol, The variable display of the second small symbol) and the fourth symbol are also stopped and displayed.

(Waiting process per special figure)
FIGS. 9-36 and 9-37 are flowcharts showing the special figure per waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is being displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 080IWS9701). . If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 080IWS9707. In this characterizing portion 080IW, when a jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decoration symbol, a stop symbol display flag 1 is set at step 080IWS9706. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the performance during the big win is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbols have been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the jackpot has not yet been executed. Go to step 080IWS9707 without executing.

If the stop design display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop design display flag 2 indicating that the small winning design is displayed as the stop design of the decoration design is set. (Step 080IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 080IWS9719. In this characterizing portion 080IW, when a small winning design is displayed as a stop design of the decoration design, a stop design display flag 2 is set at step 080IWS9718. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when executing the effect during the small winning. Therefore, the fact that the stop pattern display flag 2 is set means that the small winning pattern has been confirmed and displayed, but since the small winning medium effect has not yet been executed, the decorative pattern stop pattern of step 080IWS9704 is displayed. Go to step 080IWS9719 without executing any process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 080IWS9703). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 080IWS9703. Now, check whether the flag is set or not. If the shutter effect is being executed, the process proceeds directly to step 080IWS9705. That is, in this example, control is performed so as not to display the decoration pattern during execution of the shutter effect, so control is performed so as not to perform the process of confirming and displaying the stop pattern of the decoration pattern in step 080IWS9704.

If the shutter effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to confirm and display the stop symbols (losing symbol, big winning symbol, small winning symbol) of the left, middle and right decorative symbols that are being stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. (step 080IWS9704). It should be noted that when the first compulsory design decision designation command and the second compulsory design decision designation command are received, and the process of replacing with the lost design is executed in steps 080IWS8109 and S8113, in step 080IWS9704, the performance control CPU 120 deviates from the design. is displayed.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 080IWS9704 (Y in step 080IWS9705), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 080IWS9706).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 080IWS9707). When the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 080IWS9708).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 080IWS9709). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 080IWS9709. Now, check whether the flag is set or not. If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the shutter effect (step 080IWS9710). It should be noted that when the shutter effect is completed in step 080IWS9710, after that, it is controlled to the jackpot game state, and when the variable display of the decorative patterns is started on the image display device 5 after the jackpot game is finished, the decorative patterns and the pending display are displayed. resumed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of winning balls is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS9711). If the display of the number of prize balls is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the number of prize balls on the image display device 5 based on the current value of the counter of the number of prize balls (step 080IWS9712). .

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the big hit (step 080IWS9713). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 080IWS9714), the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts) is executed (step 080IWS9715).

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S176) during the big hit (step 080IWS9716).

If the jackpot pattern is not confirmed and displayed in the processing of step 080IWS9704 (N of step 080IWS9705), if the small winning pattern is confirmed and displayed in the processing of step 080IWS9704 (Y of step 080IWS9717), the effect control CPU 120 stops. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 080IWS9718).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a small hit start designation command is received (step 080IWS9719). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 080IWS9720).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the small winning effect (step 080IWS9721). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 080IWS9722), the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts) is executed (step 080IWS9723).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S174) during the small hit (step 080IWS9724).

In the process of step 080IWS9704, when the big hit pattern or the small hit pattern is not displayed (that is, when the losing pattern is displayed) (N in step 080IWS9705 and N in step 080IWS9717), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 080IWS9725).

(Production processing during jackpot)
FIG. 9-38 is a flow chart showing the effect processing (step S176) during the big hit in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the big-hit performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not any of the big-hit end designation commands is received (for example, whether or not any of the big-hit end designation command reception flags are set). (Step 080IWS2901). If any of the jackpot end designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 080IWS2902), and according to the contents of the process data n, the effect device (image display device 5, speaker 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) are executed (step 080IWS2903).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 080IWS2904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 080IWS2905). That is, it switches to the next set process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) in the process table. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer to start the process timer (step 080IWS2906).

If any one of the jackpot end designation commands is received (Y in step 080IWS2901), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is time to end the jackpot game based on the third probability variable jackpot (step 080IWS2907). . If the big win game based on the third probability variable big win is to end, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2912. If it is not the case of ending the big win game based on the third variable probability big win, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of ending the big win game based on the second variable probability big win (step 080IWS2908). If the big win game based on the second variable probability big win is to end, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step 080IWS2909). If the high-probability state flag is set (ie, high-probability/high-base state or high-probability/low-base state), go to step 080IWS2912. If it is not the time to end the big win game based on the second variable probability big win, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the time to end the big win game based on the first variable probability big win (step 080IWS2910). If the jackpot game based on the first variable probability jackpot is to end, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS2911). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, high probability/low base state (second KT state)), go to step 080IWS2912.

When the jackpot game based on the third probability variable jackpot is ended (Y of step 080IWS2907), when the high probability state flag is set (Y of step 080IWS2909), or when the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS2911) In Y), that is, when it is controlled to the second KT state after the end of the big hit game this time, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the shutter effect in the image display device 5 (step 080IWS2912). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for erasing the decorative symbols and pending display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS2913).

Next, effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the ending effect (step 080IWS2914). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 080IWS2915), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance devices (the image display device 5 as the performance component, the game effect lamp 9 as the performance component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the performance component) is executed (step 080IWS2916). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect period measuring timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect (step 080IWS2917). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 also resets the set jackpot end designation command reception flag.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the ending effect process (step 080IWS2918), and ends the effect process during the big hit.

(Ending effect processing)
9-39 is a flow chart showing the ending effect processing (step S177) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 080IWS951). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 080IWS952).

When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (step 080IWS952 N), the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 080IWS953), and the production device (image display device 5 , game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) are executed (step 080IWS954). For example, an effect such as displaying that the big win is over or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 080IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 080IWS956). Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer to start the process timer (step 080IWS957).

If the effect period measuring timer has timed out (Y of step 080IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is time to end the big win game based on the third probability variable big win (step 080IWS958). In the case of ending the jackpot game based on the third variable probability jackpot, the process proceeds to step 080IWS964. If it is not the case of ending the big win game based on the third variable probability big win, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of ending the big win game based on the second variable probability big win (step 080IWS959). If the jackpot game based on the second variable probability jackpot is to end, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step 080IWS960). If the high-probability state flag is set (ie, high-probability/high-base state or high-probability/low-base state), go to step 080IWS964. If it is not the time to end the big win game based on the second variable probability big win, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the time to end the big win game based on the first variable probability big win (step 080IWS961). If the jackpot game based on the first variable probability jackpot is to end, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS962). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, high probability/low base state (second KT state)), go to step 080IWS964.

If it is not the time to finish the big hit game based on the first variable probability big hit (N of step 080IWS961), or if the second KT state flag is not set (N of step 080IWS962), that is, after the end of this big hit game When the second KT state is not controlled, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the display of the number of winning balls displayed on the image display device 5 (step 0645IWS963). However, in this case, the display of the number of prize balls is only erased, and the counter of the number of prize balls is not reset. Therefore, the game state shifts to a low probability/low base state (normal state) and a right-handed operation is performed. The value of the number-of-balls-counter is maintained until the end of

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 080IWS964). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 080IWS964. Now, check whether the flag is set or not. If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the shutter effect (step 080IWS965). It should be noted that, after the shutter effect is finished in step 080IWS965, when the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols, the display of the decorative symbols and the pending display is resumed.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 080IWS966).

(Production example)
Next, the effect mode of the effect executed in this characterizing portion 080IW will be described. First, the display mode of the right hitting notification will be described. FIG. 9-40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the notification of hitting to the right. In this example, regardless of whether the big win is achieved by the variable display of the first special symbol or the big win is achieved by the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, when the jackpot game is in progress. 9-40(1), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) turns on the right-handed indicator 26 (see steps 080IWS2022A and S2022B). In addition, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40(1), the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-handed hitting display 080IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 080IWS624).

Further, in this example, when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the second special symbol, during the small winning game, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), the game control microcomputer 100 (specific , the right-handed indicator 26 is lit by the CPU 103 (see step 080IWS2029B). Also, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), the right-handed notification LED 37 is lit by the effect control CPU 120 (steps 080IWS2030B, S641) . However, unlike during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 9-40(2), the display of the right hitting display 080IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not performed.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. The hitting notification LED 37 is not lit, and the right hitting display 080IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed.

Next, the effect mode of the shutter effect will be described. FIG. 9-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect mode of the shutter effect. In addition, in FIG. 9-41, the effect screen transitions in the order of (T1), (T2), (T3), and so on. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-41, the display screen of the image display device 5 displays a decorative pattern display area 080IW010 for displaying left, middle, and right decorative patterns, and a left, middle, right first small pattern. A first small pattern display area 080IW011 and a second small pattern display area 080IW012 for displaying second small patterns on the left, middle and right are provided. Further, on the display screen of the image display device 5, there is a fourth pattern display area 080IW013 for displaying the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, and a fourth pattern display for displaying the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern. A region 080IW014 is provided. Further, on the display screen of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory display area 080IW015 displaying a first reserved display corresponding to the first reserved memory and a second reserved display area 080IW015 displaying a second reserved display corresponding to the second reserved memory. 2 reserved storage display areas 080IW016 are provided.

In this example, the fourth pattern display area 080IW013, 014 provided on the display screen of the image display device 5 shows the case of executing the variable display of the fourth pattern. Absent. For example, a luminous body such as an LED provided separately from the image display device 5 may be flashed, turned on, or turned off to perform light emission display, thereby executing the variable display of the fourth symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9-41 (T1), in the low-probability/high-base state (first KT state), when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, correspondingly, the second small symbol display area 080IW012 , the variable display of the left, middle, and right second small patterns is started, and the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns is started in the decorative design display area 080IW010, and the variable display of the fourth design is started in the fourth design display area 080IW014. is started. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T2), the second small symbol stop symbol is confirmed and displayed in the second small symbol display area 080IW012, and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 080IW010. is fixedly displayed, and the fourth stopped pattern is fixedly displayed in the fourth pattern display area 080IW014. In addition, in FIG. 9-41 (T2), the second small symbol, the decorative symbol, and the stopped symbol of the fourth symbol are displayed as fixed symbols.

Next, it is assumed that the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the final variation (50th variation) of the low probability/high base state (1st KT state). In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T3), on the image display device 5, based on the reception of the variation pattern command specifying the variation pattern including the shutter effect, the character display of "preparing for the big hit" is displayed. The shutter effect image 080IW017 including is displayed so as to close from the left and right, thereby starting the shutter effect (see step 080IWS819). In this example, it is assumed that the second variation pattern #16 is determined based on the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, which becomes the big hit variation as the final variation.

Further, when the shutter effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T3), the left, middle and right decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display area 080IW010 are erased, and the first reserved memory display area 080IW015 and the second The pending display displayed in the pending storage display area 080IW016 is erased (see step 080IWS820). However, even if the shutter effect is started and the decoration pattern is erased, the display of the second small pattern in the second small pattern display area 080IW012 is continued, and the second small pattern is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T3). In the region 080IW012, the variable display of the left, middle and right second small symbols is started. Further, the display of the fourth pattern in the fourth pattern display area 080IW014 is continued, and as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T3), the variable display of the fourth pattern is started in the fourth pattern display area 080IW014.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T4), the shutter effect is continuously executed while the second small pattern and the fourth small pattern are displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T5), the stop symbol of the second small symbol is confirmed and displayed in the second small symbol display area 080IW012, and the second small symbol in the fourth symbol display area 080IW014. Stop symbols of 4 symbols are confirmed and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 9-41 (T5), the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol and the fourth symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T5), in the image display device 5, a right-handed hitting image 080IW018 prompting a right-handed hitting operation of aiming at the right side of the game area is displayed superimposed on the shutter effect image 080IW017. be. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T5), the image display device 5 superimposes a gate passage promotion image 080IW019 on the right-handed image 080IW018 to prompt the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41 .

Next, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is controlled to the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. The shutter effect is completed by moving from the center to the left and right to be hidden and hidden (see step 080IWS9710). Then, when the shutter effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T7), a character display such as "Jumping" and the number of rounds are displayed, and the number of prize balls display 080IW020 is displayed. Thus, an effect is executed such that a big win game is started immediately after the shutter effect is finished. Then, after that, when the big win game is finished and the variable display of the next decoration pattern is started, the display of the decoration pattern and the reserved display is resumed.

In the example shown in Fig. 9-41, the final variation (50th variation) in the low probability / high base state (1st KT state) is a big hit variation, but the final variation is a losing variation or a small hit Even in the case of variation, the shutter effect is executed in the same manner as in FIGS. 9-41 (T3) and (T4). Then, after the fluctuation time is over, when the variable display of the next decoration pattern is started, the shutter effect is finished and the display of the decoration pattern and the reserved display is resumed (see steps 080IWS816, S817). However, when executing the shutter production in the variation display of the decoration pattern of the loss variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, if the variation display of the second special symbol is started on the way, that At the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the shutter performance is ended, and the display of the decorative symbol and the reserved display is resumed. In addition, when executing the shutter performance in the variation display of the decoration pattern of the loss variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the way, that At the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the shutter effect is ended, and the display of the decoration symbol and the pending display is resumed (see steps 080IWS8115 to S8121).

Next, the mode of switching the display of decorative patterns will be described. FIGS. 9-42 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the mode of switching the display of decorative patterns. Although not shown in FIGS. 9-42, the image display device 5 is provided with a fourth pattern display area for displaying the fourth pattern, and the fourth pattern is also displayed (see FIG. 9-42). 9-41).

In this example, during a period in which the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state) and a left-handed operation is performed, left, middle, right in the decorative design display area 080IW010 corresponding to the variable display of the first special design. is displayed. Therefore, when the game state is a low probability / low base state (normal state), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and it becomes a big hit, when the big hit symbol is stopped, the left column of FIG. 9-42 (1) As shown, in the first small symbol display area 080IW011, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed as the stop symbol of the first small symbol, and in the decorative symbol display area 080IW010, the first special symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. The same big winning pattern as the one small pattern is fixedly displayed. After that, when the jackpot game is started, the decoration pattern display area 080IW010 is switched to the display corresponding to the second special pattern (see step 080IWS642), and the jackpot game is finished. Then, for example, when the state is shifted to the second KT state, as shown in the right column of FIG. The same pattern as the second small pattern displayed in the pattern display area 080IW012 is displayed.

Incidentally, in this example, when the game is controlled to the second KT state when ending the jackpot game, a shutter performance is executed (see step 080IWS2912). In this case, for example, in the image display device 5, instead of the character display of "preparing for the big hit" in FIGS. It is only necessary to execute an effect in such a manner as to close the .

In addition, the left column of FIG. 9-42 (2) shows the display state of decorative symbols immediately before the end of the final variation (50th variation) in the low-probability/high-base state. In this case, since the right-handed operation is performed, as shown in the left column of FIG. The same pattern as the second small pattern displayed in the small pattern display area 080IW012 is displayed. Next, when the final variation (50th variation) is completed and the state shifts to the low probability/low base state (normal state), the state shifts to a state in which a left-handed operation is performed. The display is switched to a state in which the same pattern as the first small pattern displayed in the first small pattern display area 080IW011 is displayed as a decoration pattern corresponding to the pattern (see step 080IWS647).

However, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), if the variation display of the first special symbol executed last time accidentally results in a big hit, it is displayed in the first small symbol display area 080IW011. There is a case where the first small pattern remains the big hit pattern. In such a case, if the decoration pattern is switched to the same pattern as the first small pattern as it is, the player may misunderstand that a big win has occurred even though a big win has not occurred. . Therefore, in this example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-42 (2), when the final variation (50th variation) in the low-probability/high-base state is completed, the jackpot symbol is displayed as the first small symbol. When it is in the state of being in a state where the decoration pattern is not switched to the same pattern as the first small pattern, it is configured to switch to the initial appearance (in this example, a combination of "135" symbols). (see step 080IWS648).

In addition, the left column of FIG. 9-42 (3) is controlled to a high probability state or a high base state, and when the right hitting operation is performed, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. A case of a big hit is shown. In this case, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, as shown in the left column of FIG. 9-42 (3), the jackpot pattern is fixedly displayed as the stop pattern of the second small pattern in the second small pattern display area 080IW012. In the decorative design display area 080IW010, the same jackpot design as the second small design is confirmed and displayed as the stop design of the decorative design corresponding to the second special design. After that, since the state in which the right-handed operation is performed continues, the state in which the same pattern as the second small pattern is displayed as the decoration pattern continues, and even when the big win game ends, the state shown in FIG. 9-42 ( As shown in the right column of 3), in the decorative design display area 080IW010, the same pattern as the second small design displayed in the second small design display area 080IW012 continues as the decorative design corresponding to the second special design. displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-42, a case is shown in which the small pattern on the sub-symbol side of the first small pattern and the second small pattern is always displayed. I can't limit it. For example, among the first and second small symbols, the sub-symbol side small symbol need not always be displayed, and may be displayed only during the sub-symbol fixing period. With such a configuration, by omitting the display of unnecessary information during the fluctuation of the main pattern of the first small pattern and the second small pattern, the effect display corresponding to the main pattern (ready-to-win effect, etc.). It is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to.

In this example, both the decoration pattern and the small patterns (the first small pattern and the second small pattern) start to be changed and displayed based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command. In addition, regarding the decorative pattern, it will be in a temporary stop state (shaking fluctuation state) before the end of the fluctuation time specified in the fluctuation pattern, and the design confirmation designation command (first design confirmation designation command, second design confirmation designation command, first It will be in a fixed stop state based on the reception of the compulsory pattern confirmation designation command, the second compulsory design confirmation designation command). On the other hand, the small symbols enter a fixed stop state based on the reception of the symbol fix designation command without passing through the temporary stop state (shaking fluctuation state). In addition, as for the decorative symbols, it is possible to execute a resurrection effect to change the variable display result through a temporary stop state of out of reach.

Next, a description will be given of the effects of the shutter effect executed in the irregular jackpot or the 50th variation of the low probability/high base state. FIG. 9-43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect mode of the shutter effect executed in the irregular jackpot or the 50th variation of the low probability/high base state. In addition, in FIG. 9-43, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on. Note that the example shown in FIG. 9-43 shows, as an example, the effect mode of the shutter effect executed at the 50th variation in the low-probability/high-base state.

As shown in FIG. 9-43(A), in the low-probability/high-base state, for example, a character display 080IW031 such as "chance time" is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and an instruction to hit right is displayed. Right hitting display 080IW032 is displayed. Since it is in the middle of informing of hitting to the right, the image display device 5 performs the variable display of the decoration design corresponding to the variable display of the second special design.

Next, it is assumed that the fiftieth variation display in the low probability/high base state is started, and that the fiftieth variation display is the first special symbol variation display. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-43(B), an image is displayed on the image display device 5 as if the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 were closed, and the decorative patterns on the left, middle, and right sides are hidden, and a shutter effect is produced. is started (see step 080IWS508). Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-43 (C) to (F), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are gradually opened, and a display is performed in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are gradually visible. will be

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-43(G), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are completely opened, and left, middle, and right decoration patterns are completely visible, and the shutter effect is completed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-43(G), the character display 080IW035 such as "normal mode" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the character display 080IW036 such as "Please return to left-handed shooting" is displayed. , the return to the low-probability/low-base state (normal state) is notified, and a display prompting a left-handed operation is performed.

FIG. 9-44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the image data used in the shutter effect. Also, FIG. 9-45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a method of displaying a still image used in the shutter effect. In this example, when starting the shutter effect, instead of reproducing moving image data in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 are gradually closed from above and below, an initial image shown in FIG. A still image is displayed based on the still image data in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 are closed. In this case, in this example, the effect image 080IW037 is displayed near the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034, as shown in FIGS. 9-43(B) and 9-44(A). Further, when the still image is displayed, control is performed so that the still image is vertically vibrated in small increments according to the passage of time T, as shown in FIGS. 9-45(A) to (C). By displaying in this way, in this example, a still image is actually displayed, but from the player's point of view, the impression is given as if the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 were closed instantly. controlling.

In this example, in the shutter effect, by performing control to display still images as shown in FIGS. In addition, the display screen of the image display device 5 can be instantly covered, so that the decoration pattern can be quickly hidden.

In this example, the effect image 080IW037 is displayed, or a still image is vertically vibrated in small increments to make it appear as if the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 were closed instantaneously. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when displaying a still image, outputting a sound effect that sounds like the shutters are closed, or displaying the vibration of the characters and operation buttons, it is possible to make it look as if the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 were closed instantly. can be configured to

Then, after displaying the still image shown in FIG. 9-44(A), by reproducing the moving image data shown in FIGS. 9-44(B) to (C), the ) is displayed such that the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 are gradually opened.

In this example, a static image is used to instantly hide the decorative pattern for the effect of closing the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034, while a moving image is played for the effect of opening the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034. However, when the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 are opened, the fanfare effect and the effect of waiting for passage through the gate are executed, and the variable display of the decoration pattern is already not displayed. Even if the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are gradually opened, there is no possibility of misidentifying the variable display of the decoration pattern.

FIG. 9-46 is an explanatory diagram showing types of images displayed in the shutter effect. In this example, the shutter performance shown in FIG. 9-43 is for the case where an irregular jackpot occurs or the 50th variation display in the low probability/high base state is executed. 9-46(A), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including the characters “END” are displayed to perform the shutter effect (time saving Shutter effect for end time) is executed (see step 080IWS508). In addition, if an irregular jackpot occurs when the game state is in the low probability/low base state (normal state) or in the low probability/high base state, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B). The upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including the characters "Intense Heat Standby" are displayed, and the shutter effect (normal/time-saving shutter effect) is executed (see steps 080IWS503, S512). Also, if an irregular jackpot occurs when the game state is in the high probability/low base state (second KT state), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 containing numbers as shown in FIG. 9-46(C). is displayed, and a shutter effect (shutter effect for a small hit RUSH) accompanied by a count display is executed (see step 080IWS506).

Although not shown in FIG. 9-46, if an irregular jackpot occurs while the gaming state is in the high probability/high base state, a shutter effect for the high probability/high base state is performed. executed. In this case, for example, the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including characters such as "Lowding" may be displayed to execute the shutter effect.

Next, a description will be given of the control of the variable display in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol. FIG. 9-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when the variable display of one special symbol results in a small hit during the variable display of the other special symbol.

During the variable display of the first special symbol to be a big hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is a probability variable big hit (in this example, the first 9-47 (A), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol is displayed. The variable display continues. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (steps 080IWS1120A, Step 080 (see Y in IWS1133A).

On the other hand, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (B), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol The variable display of is also forced to be displayed as a missing symbol (N of step 080IWS1133A, see step 080IWS1134A).

It should be noted that, during the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (C), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (steps 080IWS1120A, Step 080 (See N in IWS1132A).

During the variable display of the second special symbol to be a big hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is a probability variable big hit (in this example, the first 9-47 (D), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol is displayed. The variable display continues. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120B, (See Y in step 080IWS1133B).

On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (E), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol The variable display of is also forced to stop display with a missing symbol (N of step 080IWS1133B, refer to step 080IWS1134B).

It should be noted that, during the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (F), The variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120B, Step 080 See N in IWS1132B).

The control method in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of one special symbol during the variable display of the other special symbol will be described.

(Modification 1)
9-48 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 1. FIG. In FIG. 9-48, the processing of steps 080IWS1120A to S1132A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 9-12, but in modification 1, the determination processing of step 080IWS1133A shown in FIG. 9-12 does not exist. .

In the modified example 1, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the processing of step S1134A as it is, and transmits the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 080IWS1134A). In FIG. 9-48, the processing of step 080IWS1135A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 9-12.

FIG. 9-49 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 1. FIG. In FIG. 9-49, the processing of steps 080IWS1120B to S1132B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 9-15, but in modification 1, the determination processing of step 080IWS1133B shown in FIG. 9-15 does not exist. .

In the modification 1, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed becomes a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the processing of step S1134B as it is, and transmits the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 080IWS1134B). 9-49, the processing of step 080IWS1135B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 9-15.

FIG. 9-50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when the variable display of one special symbol in the modified example 1 results in a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol.

When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special pattern during the variable display of the first special pattern that becomes a big hit, whether the variable display of the first special pattern is a big winning variation that becomes a probability variable big win. As shown in Fig. 9-50(A), when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special pattern is also forced to be a lost pattern, regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit. Stopped display (N of step 080IWS1132A, see step 080IWS1134A).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or a small hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-50 (B), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (steps 080IWS1120A, Step 080 (See N in IWS1132A).

When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol to be a big hit, whether the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation to be a probability variable big hit. As shown in Fig. 9-50(C), when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special pattern is also forced to be a lost pattern, regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit. Stopped display (N of step 080IWS1132B, see step 080IWS1134B).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or a small hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-50 (D), The variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120B, Step 080 See N in IWS1132B).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 9-51 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 2. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 9-51, the processes of steps 080IWS1120A to S1131A are the same as those shown in FIG. Instead, it includes the processing of step 080IWS1132C.

In modification 2, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1134A). In addition, in FIG. 9-51, the processing of step 080IWS1135A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 9-12.

FIG. 9-52 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 2. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 9-52, the processes of steps 080IWS1120B to S1131B are the same as those shown in FIG. Instead, it includes the processing of step 080IWS1132D.

In the modification 2, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1134B). In addition, in FIG. 9-52, the processing of step 080IWS1135B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 9-15.

FIG. 9-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when the variable display of the other special symbol results in a small win while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 2. FIG.

When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special pattern during the variable display of the first special pattern that becomes a big hit, whether the variable display of the first special pattern is a big winning variation that becomes a probability variable big win. As shown in FIG. 9-53(A), the first special symbol continues to be varied and displayed even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (steps 080IWS1120A, (See Y in step 080IWS1132C).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or a small hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (B), When the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forced to be stopped and displayed as a lost symbol (N of step 080IWS1132C, see step 080IWS1134A).

When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol to be a big hit, whether the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation to be a probability variable big hit. As shown in FIG. 9-53(C), the second special symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, regardless of whether or not the variation is a big hit that is a normal big hit. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120B, (See Y in step 080IWS1132D).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (D), When the small winning symbol is stop-displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcefully stopped-displayed as a lost symbol (N of step 080IWS1132D, see step 080IWS1134B).

In addition, as a control method in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol, in addition to those shown in the first and second modifications, for example, losing During the variable display of the first special symbol, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, it is forced to come off and stop, while the first special symbol to be a small winning is displayed during the variable display. In the variable display of the second special symbol, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation may be continued.

Also, for example, during normal state (low probability/low base state), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is lost and fluctuates. It may be constructed so as to be stopped forcibly in either small hit variation or big hit variation. With such a configuration, in this example, when 50 fluctuation displays in the low-probability/high-base state are completed, the transition to the low-probability/low-base state is made (see FIG. 9-24). When 1 to 4 second reserved memories are accumulated when changing to a low probability/low base state after ending the variable display, and if there is a second reserved memory that becomes a big hit among them, the game is forced to lose and stop. Thus, it is possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing. In particular, in a gaming machine configured to be controllable to the KT state as in this example, by performing a right-handed operation in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the second start winning port is easily started to win. It is also possible to have a capture method in which the first start winning opening is started to win and the first special symbol is displayed variably, while the second special symbol is variably displayed by the start winning. It is effective as a preventive measure for the method.

As described above, various aspects can be conceived as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of one special symbol during the variable display of the other special symbol.

(Modification 3)
In addition, in this characteristic part 080IW, in the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the same control is performed to forcibly stop and display the lost symbol. Although the case (see FIG. 9-47) is shown, different controls are possible. FIG. 9-54 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 3. As shown in FIG. Incidentally, in the modification 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 9-12. In FIG. 9-54, the processes of steps 080IWS1120B to S1130B are the same as those shown in FIG. not exist. Therefore, in the third modification, if the first special symbol display device 4A does not derive and display the big hit symbol (N of step 080IWS1130B), the CPU 103 terminates the process as it is.

FIG. 9-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when the variable display of the other special symbol results in a small hit while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 3. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 9-55 (A) and (C), in modification 3, during the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit, the small hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, similarly to FIGS. 9-47 (A) and (C). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 (D) and (F), during the fluctuation display of the second special pattern that becomes a loss, a small hit, or a probability variable big hit, the small hit pattern stops in the fluctuation display of the first special pattern. When it is displayed, like FIGS. 9-47 (D) and (F), even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-55(B), in the modification 3, during the variable display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit, the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol. Similarly to FIG. 9-47(B), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (E), in the modification 3, during the variable display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit, the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol. 9-47(E), the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-55, in modification 3, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display of the special symbol is forced with the missing symbol. Stop display control is different.

In the modification 3, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed by the second special symbol variation display during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit, the game is forcibly lost and stopped, while the normal big win is achieved. While the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display is continued when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol. Absent. For example, conversely, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed by the second special symbol variation display during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit, the variable display is continued while the normal big win is performed. It may be constructed such that when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed by the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, the machine is forced to come off and stop. Also, for example, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol variation display during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probability variable big hit or a normal big hit), the forced loss is performed. On the other hand, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol which is a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probability variable big win or a normal big win), it fluctuates. The display may be configured to continue. As such, in some form, the control for the forced dropout stop may be different between when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 9-56 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 4. FIG. In FIG. 9-56, the processing of steps 080IWS1120A-S1133A are similar to those shown in FIG. 9-12.

In modification 4, in step 080IWS1133A, when the variable display of the first special symbol that does not result in any of the first, second, and third probability variable jackpots (that is, the normal jackpot) is being executed , the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 080IWS1131A). If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if the probability variation state is not set), the process is terminated as it is. If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if it is in the variable probability state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first compulsory design confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1134A). The processing of step 080IWS1135A is the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 9-12.

In the fourth modification, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, by executing the determination process of step 080IWS1131A, The variable display of the first special pattern is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the lost pattern, but the variable display of the first special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed with the lost pattern in the probability variable state. On the other hand, even if the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, is not in the probability variable state, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 9-57 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 4. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 9-57, the processing of steps 080IWS1120B-S1133B are similar to those shown in FIG. 9-15.

In modification 4, in step 080IWS1133B, when the variable display of the first special symbol that does not result in any of the first probability variable jackpot, the second probability variable jackpot, and the third probability variable jackpot (that is, the normal jackpot) is being executed , the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 080IWS1131B). If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if the probability variation state is not set), the process is terminated as it is. If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1134B). The processing of step 080IWS1135B is the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 9-15.

In modification 4, by executing the determination process of step 080IWS1131B, during the variable display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, The variable display of the second special pattern is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the lost pattern, but the variable display of the second special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed with the lost pattern in the probability variable state. On the other hand, even during variable display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit, if the probability variable state is not in effect, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that, in the modification 4, whether or not the probability variation flag is set (whether or not the probability variation state) was forcibly removed depending on whether the stop display in the pattern was shown, but only such an aspect can't For example, depending on whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set, it may be configured to forcibly stop and display the lost symbol. Further, for example, only when the high probability/low base state (high probability flag is ON, high base flag is OFF), control may be performed to forcibly stop and display the lost symbols. In some form, it may be configured so as to perform control to forcibly stop and display the lost symbols according to the current game state.

In addition, as described above, in the case of performing control to forcibly stop and display the losing pattern only in the high probability/low base state, the variable display of one identification information prevents the normal big hit, It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

(Modification 5)
Also, in this example, depending on whether it is a period for performing a left-handed operation or a period for performing a right-handed operation, a decorative design is displayed in correspondence with the first special design or in correspondence with the second special design. While switching whether to display the decoration pattern, both the first small pattern and the second small pattern are displayed continuously. It may be configured to switch whether the first small pattern is displayed or the second small pattern is displayed, depending on the presence.

FIG. 9-58 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the mode of switching display of decorative symbols in Modification 5. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 9-58, the mode of switching the decorative patterns is the same as the mode shown in FIG. 9-42. In this example, as shown in the left column of FIG. 9-58 (1) and the right column of FIG. 9-58 (2), it is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state), and a state of performing a left-handed operation In this case, the second small pattern display area 080IW012 is erased based on the reception of the right-handed lighting end designation command, and only the display of the first small pattern in the first small pattern display area 080IW011 is displayed. state can be switched. In addition, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-58 (1), the left column of FIG. 9-58 (2), and the left column of FIG. When the hitting operation is to be performed, the first small pattern display area 080IW011 is erased and the second small pattern is displayed in the second small pattern display area 080IW012 based on the reception of the right-hand lighting start designation command. You can switch to the state where only is displayed.

(Modification 6)
In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted, but the right-handed lighting start designation command is transmitted. You may FIG. 9-59 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol stop processing in Modification 6. As shown in FIG. In modification 6, the processes of steps 080IWS2010A to S2027A are the same as those shown in FIGS. 9-13.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 080IWS2028A). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2030A). The processing of steps 080IWS2031A-S2032A is the same as those shown in FIGS. 9-13.

In addition, in the sixth modification, since the right-handed lighting start designation command is transmitted even when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the small hit is achieved, when the small hit game is finished, the figure In the small hit end process shown in 9-22, the same process as in step 080IWS2307 is executed and a right-handed lighting end designation command is transmitted.

FIG. 9-60 is a flow chart showing a specific example of command analysis processing (step 080IWS205) in the sixth modification. It should be noted that in Modification 6, the processing of steps 080IWS611 to S639, S640 to S643, and S644 to S672 are the same as those shown in FIGS. 9-27 to 9-30.

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 080IWS639), the production control CPU 120 is controlled to a small winning game state by confirming and displaying a small winning symbol in the variable display of the first special symbol. It is checked whether or not it is the case (step 080IWS639X). Whether or not the small winning symbol is confirmed and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol and is controlled to the small winning game state is determined, for example, by receiving the small winning start designation command and the second special symbol. It can be determined by confirming whether or not a small winning symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of one small symbol. If the small winning design is confirmed and displayed in the variable display of the first special design and is controlled to the small winning game state (Y of step 080IWS639X), the step is performed without executing the processing of steps 080IWS640 to S642. Go to 080IWS611.

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 080IWS643), the production control CPU 120 is controlled to a small winning game state by confirming and displaying a small winning symbol in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. It is confirmed whether or not there is a case (step 080IWS643X). If the small winning design is confirmed and displayed in the variable display of the first special design and is controlled to the small winning game state (Y of step 080IWS643X), the steps are performed without executing the processing of steps 080IWS644 to S649. Go to 080IWS611.

According to the modification 6, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and it becomes a small hit, the right-handed lighting start designation command is transmitted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the side of the effect control CPU 120. is executed to determine that it is a case of a small hit, and control is performed so as not to perform right-handed notification, and whether the decoration pattern is displayed in correspondence with the first special pattern or the second special pattern. is controlled so as not to switch

As described above, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, the variable display of the first identification information (eg, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (eg, the second special symbol) are performed in parallel. is executable. In addition, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state, and can be controlled to a non-special state (for example, a low It is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) that is more frequently controlled to a special state than the probability/low base state (normal state). Further, as the special state, control is possible between a first special state (for example, the first KT state) and a second special state (for example, the second KT state) that is more advantageous than the first special state, and a predetermined condition is established. It is possible to control to the second special state based on what has been done (for example, the third probability variable jackpot, completion of 50 or 100 times of variable display in the high probability/high base state (first KT state)) be. Further, when controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the second identification information when being controlled to the non-special state, based on the variable display of the second identification information when being controlled to the second special state than when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, the first probability variable jackpot or the second probability variable jackpot during the high probability/low base state (second KT state) is immediately controlled to a high probability/low base state (2nd KT state), whereas the first and second probability variable jackpots occur during the low probability/low base state (normal state). is controlled to a high-probability/high-base state (first KT state), and then to a high-probability/low-base state (second KT state) after completion of 50 or 100 times of fluctuation display). Therefore, when it is configured to be controllable to the special state, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

In particular, in this example, since the low probability/low base state (normal state) is during the left-handed operation period, it is normal for a big hit to occur in the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, when a big hit occurs during the low-probability/low-base state (normal state), the second reserved memory remaining after ending the high-probability/low-base state (second KT state) becomes the big win. or when a big hit occurs due to the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol by intentionally performing a right-handed operation during the low-probability/low-base state (normal state). is. In this example, if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the low probability/low base state (normal state) and a big hit is achieved, the high probability/ By providing a case of being controlled in a low base state (second KT state), a penalty is given to a strategic operation such as a right-handed operation in such a normal state, while reducing interest in the game. so that it can be suppressed.

In this example, as a specific example of the case where "predetermined conditions are unlikely to be satisfied", the high-probability/low base state (second KT state) is immediately controlled to the high-probability/low base state (second KT state) ( In other words, high probability 0 times), while in the low probability / low base state (normal state), when the fluctuation display ends 50 times or 100 times, it will enter the high probability / low base state (second KT state) Although the case where it is controlled (that is, 50 times or 100 times at the high base frequency) has been shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even if a big hit occurs in the high-probability/low-base state (second KT state), it is temporarily controlled to the high-probability/high-base state (first KT state), and a relatively small number of times, 10 or 30 times, is displayed. When finished, it is controlled to a high probability / low base state (2nd KT state), whereas in the low probability / low base state (normal state), when the relatively large number of 50 or 100 times of fluctuation display is completed It may be configured to be controlled to a high probability/low base state (second KT state). In such a way, the time to transition to the high-probability/low base state (second KT state) is higher in the low-probability/low-base state (normal state) than in the high-probability/low base state (second KT state). It is only necessary to make the transition to the high-probability/low base state (second KT state) difficult by, for example, applying .

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, even in the low probability / high base state or high probability / high base state, when the first probability variable big hit or the second probability variable big hit occurs, 50 times of fluctuation display is controlled to a high-probability/low-base state (second KT state) after the end of , so that the probability/low-base is higher than when the first variable-probability big hit or the second variable-probability big hit occurs during the high-probability/low-base state. A case is shown in which the transition to the state (second KT state) is made difficult, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, during the low-probability/high-base state, it is also during the right-handed operation period and the penalty element is low, so the high-probability/low-base state ( It may be configured to control to the second KT state).

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, when controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information while being controlled to the second special state, when controlled to the non-special state, the first 1. The predetermined condition is more likely to be satisfied than when the control is performed to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, the first When a variable probability big hit or a second variable probability big hit occurs, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (1st KT state), and after that, when the variable display is completed 50 times or 100 times, the high probability / low base state (1st 2KT state), while the high probability / low base state (second KT state) immediately high probability / low base state (second KT state), and as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the selection ratio of the first variable probability big hit and the second variable probability big win is high). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose interest.

In particular, immediately after moving from the low probability / low base state (normal state) to the high probability / low base state (second KT state), if the first special symbol is displayed again and the big hit occurs, the first special symbol will be displayed at a high rate. There are cases where it becomes a variable probability big hit or a second variable probability big hit. Otherwise, the player may be disappointed. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, during the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the first high probability variable jackpot or the second probability variable jackpot immediately high probability / low base state (second KT state) to prevent such disappointment. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the irregular jackpot.

In this example, during the high-probability/low-base state (second KT state), even if the first variable-probability jackpot or the second variable-probability jackpot is immediately controlled to the high-probability/low base state (second KT state), It is not limited to such aspects. For example, during the high probability / low base state (2nd KT state), when the 1st probability variable jackpot or the 2nd probability variable jackpot is reached, when the relatively small number of times of 10 or 30 times of fluctuation display is completed, the high probability / low base It may be configured so as to be controlled to the state (second KT state), and it is sufficient if it is configured in some form such that "predetermined conditions are likely to be satisfied".

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. Also, when a set value with a low degree of advantage (for example, a set value of "1") is set, the predetermined condition is more likely to be met than when a set value with a high degree of advantage is set. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, since the set value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability, a jackpot hit occurs in the high probability/high base state (first KT state). It is easy to perform variable display up to 100 times or 100 times, and it is easy to shift to the high-probability/low-base state (second KT state). Therefore, even when the advantage is set to a low set value, it is possible to create expectations and improve interest in the game.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 080IW, when the game state is switched (for example, when an irregular jackpot occurs, when executing the 50th variation display in the low probability/high base state), a predetermined display ( For example, it is possible to execute a special effect (for example, a shutter effect) that temporarily makes the left, middle, and right decorative patterns difficult to see. As a special effect, a specific image (for example, a static image in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 shown in FIGS. 9-43(B) and 9-44(A) are closed) is displayed to make the predetermined display difficult to see. 9-43 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 9-44 (B) and (C). A moving image in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 are gradually opened) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly hide the predetermined display and switch the display with a simple display in the special effect. In addition, it is possible to save the video production period and production cost required for the special presentation.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 080IW, when the game state is switched (for example, when an irregular jackpot occurs, when executing the 50th variation display in the low probability/high base state), a specific image ( For example, a static image in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 shown in FIGS. It is possible to execute a special effect (for example, a shutter effect) that temporarily makes it difficult to see. In addition, it is possible to display a plurality of types of specific images (for example, static images shown in FIGS. 9-46 (A) to (C)), and different types of specific images can be displayed according to the game state when controlled in an advantageous state. (For example, when the shutter effect is executed in the 50th variation display of the low probability / high base state, the upper and lower including the letters “END” as shown in FIG. 9-46 (A) Shutters 080IW033, 034 are displayed, and when an irregular jackpot occurs when the game state is in the low probability/low base state (normal state) or in the low probability/high base state, the process shown in FIG. 9-46 ( As shown in B), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including the characters "Intense heat waiting" are displayed, and when the game state is a high probability/low base state (second KT state), an irregular big win occurs. 9-46(C), upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including numbers are displayed). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly hide the predetermined display and switch the display with a simple display in the special effect. In addition, it is possible to save the video production period and production cost required for the special presentation.

Also, for example, especially when a normal jackpot occurs during a high probability/high base state or a high probability/low base state, the variable probability state ends or the second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends. However, as shown in FIG. 9-46(C), a shutter effect accompanied by a count display or a shutter effect including characters such as "Lowding" is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively agitated.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, small hit game state) different from the advantageous state, and a special state (for example, high probability / low base state (second KT state)). Therefore, by providing a situation in which a game value is likely to be given due to a special state, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to variably display the effect identification information (for example, decoration pattern) corresponding to the variably display of the first identification information and the second identification information. Also, in response to the transition of the game state, a special image (for example, shutter effect image 080IW017) is displayed in the display area where the variable display of the effect identification information is executed, thereby reducing the visibility of the effect identification information. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity between the effect identification information and the game state at the timing of transition of the game state.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (for example, a high base state) in which the execution frequency of variable display of the second identification information is increased compared to a non-predetermined state (for example, a low base state). , a special effect (for example, a shutter effect image 080IW017 shown in FIG. 9-41) for displaying a special image (for example, a shutter effect image 080IW017 shown in FIG. 9-41) for notifying that the game state is shifted with high visibility when the predetermined state is shifted to the non-predetermined state ( For example, a shutter effect) is executed, and non-display control of the effect identification information is performed when a special effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discomfort between the effect identification information and the game state when shifting from the predetermined state to the non-predetermined state, and reduce the processing load related to the display of the effect identification information.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, small hit game state) different from the advantageous state, and a special state (for example, high probability / low base state (second KT state)). In addition, transition performance (for example, shutter performance) can be executed when the special state is controlled after the end of the advantageous state, and non-display control of the performance identification information is performed when the transition performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity between the performance identification information and the game state when the game is controlled to the special state after the end of the advantageous state, and reduce the processing load related to the display of the performance identification information.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 080IW, the non-display control of the effect identification information is started corresponding to the transition of the game state, and the effect is produced based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the start of the variable display of the next decorative symbol). Ends hiding control of identification information. Therefore, it is possible to display the effect identification information again while preventing the occurrence of discomfort between the effect identification information and the game state.

In this example, a case is shown in which display of decorative symbols and reserved display is resumed based on the start of variable display of the next decorative symbol as a predetermined condition, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, based on the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) from the start of non-display of the decoration pattern and the reserved display, the display of the decorative pattern and the reserved display is restarted assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied. may be configured.

Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, it is possible to store information related to the variable display as a reserved memory, display the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory, and hide the reserved display during the non-display control of the effect identification information. Display status. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display of the pending display in addition to the processing load related to the display of the effect identification information.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 080IW, it is possible to execute variable display of reduced identification information (for example, small symbols (first small pattern, second small pattern)) in which the effect identification information is reduced, and the effect identification information The reduced identification information is displayed regardless of whether the non-display control of is in progress. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the game situation even during non-display control of the effect identification information.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern), it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state). In addition, when ending the non-display control of the effect identification information, display the combination of the effect identification information of the display result different from the specific display result (for example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-42 (2), The decorative pattern is switched to the initial appearance and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is misunderstood as being controlled in an advantageous state.

Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, after executing the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, the specific condition (for example, transition to the probability variable state or the high base state) is established. Based on this, the variable display of the effect identification information is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. In addition, based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, execution of the final variation (for example, the 50th variation) in a low-probability/high-base state) after the establishment of the specific condition, corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information Variable display of the performance identification information is executed. Also, a display result different from the display result of the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information when the specific condition is satisfied corresponds to the variable display of the first identification information when the special condition is satisfied. The display result of the variable display of the effect identification information is displayed (for example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-42 (2), the decoration pattern is switched to the initial appearance and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game situation is misunderstood.

Moreover, according to this characterizing portion 080IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of game states (for example, jackpot game state, variable probability state, high base state). In addition, it is possible to perform variable display of the first special identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second special identification information (eg, second special symbol), and to variable display of the first special identification information A first variable effect display for executing variable display of the effect identification information (for example, decoration pattern) correspondingly, and a second variable effect for executing the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information. Either display can be executed as a variable display. Further, based on the reception of state transition information (for example, right-handed lighting start designation command, right-handed lighting end designation command) corresponding to the transition of the game state, the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display are changed. Switch the variable display from one of them to the other (for example, switch to the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, and receive the right-handed lighting end designation command Based on this, the display is switched to the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern). Therefore, it is possible to switch the variable display from one of the first variable effect display and the second variable display to the other based on the reception of the state transition information, so that the processing load of controlling the effect can be reduced. can.

For example, as shown in this example, in a gaming machine configured so that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is necessary to monitor both the variation state of the first special symbol and the variation state of the second special symbol in order to switch whether the decorative symbol is displayed correspondingly, and the processing load on the CPU 120 side for effect control is increased. There is a possibility that the display of decorative patterns cannot be switched smoothly. Therefore, in this example, by configuring to switch the display of the decorative pattern based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command and the right-handed lighting end designation command transmitted in relation to the change in the game state, such This prevents the CPU 120 for effect control from being burdened with processing more than necessary, and enables smooth switching of the display of decorative patterns.

In this example, the case of switching the display of the decorative pattern based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command and the right-handed lighting end designation command as the state transition information is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when a background designating command capable of specifying a game state can be transmitted, the game state may be determined based on the reception of the background designating command as state transition information, and the display of decorative patterns may be switched. good. Further, for example, when a game state designation command capable of specifying the game state itself can be transmitted, the game state is determined based on the reception of the game state designation command as the state transition information, and the display of the decoration pattern is switched. It may be configured as Various modes are conceivable as such state transition information.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information can be executed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load particularly when the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information can be executed in parallel.

In this example, a case is shown in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in a gaming machine configured to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the winning order of the first start winning hole and the second start winning hole, this characteristic part 080IW configuration may be applied. Also, for example, in a gaming machine configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol, the configuration shown in the characteristic portion 080IW may be applied.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small win game state) different from the advantageous state. , can be controlled to a special state (for example, a high probability/low base state (second KT state)) in which game value is likely to be awarded due to the special state. Therefore, by providing a situation in which a game value is likely to be given due to a special state, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

Further, according to the modification 5 of the characteristic part 080IW, it is possible to variably display the reduced identification information (for example, the small pattern (first small pattern, second small pattern)) in which the effect identification information is reduced. , corresponding to the first reduced variable display for executing the variable display of the reduced identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information based on the reception of the state transition information, and the variable display of the second special identification information. Then, the variable display is switched from one to the other of the second reduced variable display for performing variable display of the reduced identification information (for example, see FIG. 9-58). Therefore, by making it possible to switch the variable display of the reduced identification information in correspondence with the state transition information, the processing load of effect control can be further reduced.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 080IW, by a variable display mode different from the effect identification information, the special identification information (for example, the fourth pattern) whose visibility is lower than the effect identification information is variably displayed, and the state transition information is displayed. variable display of the special identification information regardless of whether or not the Therefore, even if the variable display of the effect identification information is switched, it is possible to recognize the game situation.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, as the state transition information, it is a situation in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) is operated to a predetermined area (for example, a right area of the game area) of the game area. switching the variable display from one of the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display to the other based on the reception of predetermined operation information (for example, right-handed lighting start designation command) indicating that Switching to the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command). Therefore, the information indicating the state of the game medium shooting operation and the information corresponding to the transition of the game state can be used together, and the information storage area can be reduced.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 080IW, the given game value (for example, the number of winning balls) is totaled. Also, based on the reception of the predetermined operation information, totaling of the game value is started, and an operation of shooting the game medium to a specific area (for example, a left area of the game area) other than the predetermined area of the game area is performed. Aggregation of the game value is terminated based on the reception of the specific operation information (for example, right-handed lighting end designation command) indicating the current situation. Therefore, it is possible to manage the tally of the game value with the reception of the information indicating the situation of the shooting operation of the game medium as a trigger.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 080IW, a special image (for example, a shutter effect image 080IW017) is displayed in the display area where the variable display of the effect identification information is executed in response to the transition of the game state, and the effect identification information is visually recognized. reduce sexuality. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity between the effect identification information and the game state at the timing of transition of the game state.

Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, after the variable display of the effect identification information is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information, the specific condition (for example, transition to the probability variable state or the high base state) is established. Based on that, the variable display of the effect identification information is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information. In addition, it corresponds to the variable display of the first special identification information based on the fact that the special condition (for example, the final variation (for example, the 50th variation) in the low probability / high base state) is satisfied after the specific condition is satisfied. to execute the variable display of the effect identification information. Further, the variable display of the first special identification information when the special condition is satisfied is different from the display result of the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information when the specific condition is satisfied. (For example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-42 (2), the decoration pattern is switched to the initial appearance and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game situation is misunderstood.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (for example, a high-base state) in which the execution frequency of variable display of the second special identification information is increased compared to the non-predetermined state. Therefore, by providing a predetermined state in which the execution frequency of variable display of the second special identification information is increased, interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small win game state) different from the advantageous state. , state transition information (for example, right-handed lighting start designation command, right-handed lighting end designation command) is transmitted. Also, when the non-predetermined state is controlled to a special state, the state transition information is not transmitted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unnecessary execution of switching control of variable display of the effect identification information, and reduce the processing load of the effect control.

Further, according to the modification 6 of the characteristic part 080IW, the state transition information is transmitted even when the non-predetermined state is controlled to the special state. Further, even if the state transition information is received, if the non-predetermined state is controlled to the special state, the switching between the first variable effect display and the second variable effect display is not performed. Therefore, while preventing an increase in the control load on the information transmission side, it is possible to prevent wasteful execution of the switching control of the variable display of the effect identification information, thereby reducing the processing load of the effect control.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, the variable display of the first identification information (eg, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (eg, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. , when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player, and the display result of the variable display is a special display result. When a display result (for example, a small winning pattern) is derived and displayed, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. In addition, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable probability jackpot pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot pattern). The degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to the probability variable state after the jackpot game ends). Also, during the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information corresponding to the first specific display result, during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information is derived and displayed, the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, the first special symbol or the second 2 The variable display of special symbols is continuously executed). Also, during the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information is derived and displayed, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, a lost design) (for example, the variable display of the first special design or the second special design is a lost design. is forcibly stopped). Therefore, it is possible to implement control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Specifically, in spite of the transition to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or probability variable state, if the variation display corresponding to the remaining retention of one identification information becomes a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot), The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or variable probability state ends immediately, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease. On the other hand, if the variable display corresponding to the remaining retention of the identification information on one side is forcibly stopped and displayed (forcibly lost), even if the variable display is a probability variable big hit, it will be forced to be lost. As a result, the game value given to the player in an advantageous state (jackpot game state) decreases, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this feature part 080IW, while the variable display that is a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) is forced to miss, the variable display that is a probability variable jackpot is changed (suspended the measurement of the variable time). , while suppressing the decrease in the game value given to the player, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this example, as a mode of "not stopping the variable display of one identification information", the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Although the case of continuously executing is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), and the suspended variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small winning game. may As long as it does not completely stop the variable display in some form, it is acceptable.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which game values (for example, prize balls) are likely to be awarded due to the special state. Therefore, by providing a situation in which the game value is likely to be given due to the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable variable state))). Further, based on the derivation display of the first specific display result, control is performed to the specific state (for example, control to the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game based on the variable probability big hit), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on that, it is controlled to a non-specific state (for example, it is not controlled to a probability variable state after the end of a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to implement control considering whether or not to be controlled to a specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, the special display result can be derived and displayed in both cases of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the execution of the variable display of the second identification information ( Figures 9-1 and 9-2). Also, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information, based on the derived display of the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the first identification Variable display of information is derived and displayed according to a predetermined display result (see FIG. 9-55(B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information is not controlled to derive and display the variable display of a predetermined display result (see FIG. 9-55(E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is performed.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable variable state))). Further, the variable display executing means performs variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, when being controlled to the specific state. During the execution of, based on the fact that a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (FIGS. 9-56, 9- 57). Further, when being controlled to the non-specified state, during variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information corresponding to the result of the second specific display, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result (see FIGS. 9-56 and 9-57). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether or not the control is in a specific state.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, the first identification information (eg, first special symbol ) can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed based on the game medium entering the second start area (for example, the second start winning opening). It is possible. In addition, a variable means (for example, a special variable winning A ball device 17) is provided. In addition, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a special state that is less advantageous than the advantageous state) For example, it can be controlled to either a small winning game state), and the variable means is controlled to the first state when it is controlled to the special state. In addition, the first starting area is provided so that a game medium that moves along a predetermined path (for example, a left area of the game area) among the movement paths in which the game medium can move can enter, and the variable means is one of the movement paths. A game medium that moves along a specific path (for example, a right area of the game area) is provided so as to be able to enter. In addition, it is possible to execute a specific notification (for example, right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 9-40 (1) and (2)) for promoting shooting of game media to a specific path, and variable display of the first identification information is executed, the specific notification is not executed (see, for example, FIG. 9-40 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to make an appropriate notification about the acceleration of the shooting of game media.

Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, the first reservation storage means (for example, the first reservation storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as a reservation memory, and the variable display of the second identification information a second reserved storage means (for example, a second reserved storage buffer) capable of storing information relating to as reserved storage. Further, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is entered. In addition to being controllable, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, a special state (for example, Small hit game state) can be controlled. Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information increases the frequency of the special display result. Further, when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays, As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a lost pattern) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly ended, and the reserved memory can be consumed smoothly.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 080IW, it is possible to give a predetermined value when it is controlled to a special state (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of game balls into the special winning opening), It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled in an advantageous state (for example, pay out 15 prize balls based on the winning of game balls into the big winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 9-40 (1) and (2)) and the first specific notification It is possible to execute the second specific notification (for example, the display of the right-handed hitting display 080IW007 shown in FIG. 9-40 (1)). Also, when controlled to be in an advantageous state, the first specific notification and second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 9-40 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the special state is controlled. When it does, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 9-40 (2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, variable display of a decoration pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect in a common mode when it is controlled to a special state and when it is not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained , forcibly stop and display non-reach out-of-order symbols). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognizability of the control to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, it is possible to smoothly digest the reserved memory stored in the second reserved storage means.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, the delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium (for example, the regulation piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) is provided on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed in the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the attack countermeasures against the gaming machine.

Note that the delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area, a passage member is provided as a delay means for moving the game ball so as to meander left and right. You may

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 080IW, the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) for controlling the progress of the game, and the effect based on the information from the game control means Controlling effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120) is provided. In addition, the game control means controls execution of notification by notification means (for example, right-handed indicator 26) that performs predetermined notification. Moreover, the effect control means executes specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to notification by the notification means. Therefore, appropriate notification can be realized while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the right hitting notification is executed during the big win game. Although a case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left big winning hole) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right big winning hole) is also provided on the right side of the game area. When a big win is achieved by the variation display of the pattern, the left big prize winning port is opened during the big win game, and when a big win is achieved by the variation display of the second special pattern, the right big prize winning port is opened during the big win game. When applied to a gaming machine configured as above, when a big hit is achieved by the variable display of the second special symbol, while executing the right-handed notification during the big win game, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. It may be configured not to execute the right hitting notification during the big winning game when the big winning is achieved. Further, in the case of such a configuration, when a big win is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, it may be constituted so as to execute left-handed information during the big win game. In other words, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right big winning hole) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit is achieved by the variable display of the first special symbol, the player is prevented from erroneously performing a right-handed operation by executing a left-handed notice during the big-hit game. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

In addition, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, the case where the right hitting notification is executed even during the KT state is shown, but such a case is shown. It is not limited to any form. For example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the second start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, it is configured not to execute the right-handed notification during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. good too.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the lighting of the right hitting indicator 26 and the right hitting notification LED 37 only during the jackpot game, the right hitting indication 080IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to execute the right hitting notification. Although the case where it does is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even during the second KT state (during the small winning RUSH), when executing the first variation display after the end of the big winning game, in addition to the lighting of the right hitting display 26 and the right hitting notification LED 37 It is also possible to display a right-hand hitting display 080IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby executing the right-hand hitting notification. Alternatively, in this case, for example, in the ending period at the end of the jackpot game, in addition to the lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37, the right-handed display 080IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. You may comprise so that right-handed information may be performed by .

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large right-handed display 080IW007 shown in FIG. 9-40(1), the image display device 5 can display a symbol indicating right-handed (for example, a right-pointing triangle display). By, you may comprise right-handed information so that it can be performed.

In addition, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol, the right hitting notification is performed during the small winning game (see FIG. 9-40 (2)), and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit occurs, the case where the right hitting notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-40 (3)) is shown, but when a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol It may be configured so that there is a case where the right-handed information is not performed even in the case. For example, in a normal state and in a situation where a left-handed operation should be performed, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the right-handed information is not given during the small-hit game. You may

Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player. is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, it is controllable to a non-specific state (eg, non-variable probability state) and a specific state (eg, variable probability state) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for judging a big hit) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. A special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display is included. In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. In addition, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the setting value, and is common when being controlled to a non-specific state and when being controlled to a specific state (FIGS. 9-1 and 9 -2). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the set values change the lottery probability and type distribution other than the jackpot winning probability, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball output performance) depending on the set value will become too noticeable, and gambling will increase excessively. There is Therefore, in this characteristic part 080IW, the number of special determination values is made common regardless of the setting value (small hit winning probability is made common), thereby preventing the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the setting value. This prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol and can be executed in parallel). In addition, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information increases the frequency of special display results (for example, small winning symbols). Therefore, in a game machine that can be controlled to a special state, it is possible to realize appropriate playability.

Further, according to this characterizing portion 080IW, as special states, a first special state (for example, the first KT state) and a second special state (for example, the second KT state) that is more advantageous than the first special state. Controllable. Therefore, in a game machine that can be controlled to the second special state, it is possible to realize appropriate playability.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, normal jackpot, first variable probability big hit, second variable probability big hit, third variable probability big hit). Also, the type of the advantageous state is determined using the advantage type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. Also, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-3). Therefore, it is possible to realize more appropriate playability.

Specifically, in this characteristic part 080IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the jackpot type distribution is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value is excessively large. It prevents the gambling property from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-3, regardless of which of the setting values "1" to "6", the allocation of the jackpot type is the same, but such It is not limited to modes. For example, it is also possible to vary the determination ratio of the jackpot type depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" is set, so that the set value makes a difference in the degree of advantage.

Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player. is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for judging a big hit) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. A special judgment value for determining to derive and display (for example, a judgment value for judging a small hit), and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. and a predetermined judgment value (for example, a judgment value for discrepancy judgment). In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. Also, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set values (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Also, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all set values, and the number of predetermined determination values varies depending on the set values (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the setting value and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to a non-specific state (eg, non-variable probability state) and a specific state (eg, variable probability state) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined judgment value is included in judgment values corresponding to specific states of all setting values (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel with the variable display). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is greater than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information during the specific state The corresponding decision value includes a predetermined decision value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the setting value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information during the specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for judging a big hit) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. A special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display is included. In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. In addition, the number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is common regardless of the setting value (see FIG. 9-2), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information The number of special determination values differs between the value and the determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing an appropriate playability.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko machine 2... Game board 3... Frame for game machine 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 10... General winning port 11... Main board 12... Performance control board 13... Sound control board 14... LED control board 15... Relay board 17... Special variable winning ball device 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting Mouth switch 23... First count switch 24... Second count switch 30... Ball-hitting handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 41... Pass gate 100... Microcomputer for game control 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A game machine that includes an operation means that can be operated by a player, performs variable display of performance identification information, and can be controlled in an advantageous state,
specific identification information variable display means capable of variably displaying specific identification information corresponding to the variable display of the production identification information;
game state control means capable of controlling a plurality of game states;
a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect that temporarily makes the effect identification information invisible while not making the specific identification information invisible when the game state is switched,
The special production execution means is
As the special effect , the plurality of non-separated specific images based on still image data are displayed without displaying the plurality of separated specific images based on moving image data gradually joining together. After displaying the identification information in front and executing a pseudo-closed effect in which all the front sides of the effect identification information are made invisible, the plurality of specific images are separated to open so that all the front sides of the effect identification information can be visually recognized. While performing the production,
A plurality of types of the plurality of specific images can be displayed,
displaying the plurality of specific images of different types in accordance with the gaming state when controlled to the advantageous state;
When the special effect execution means executes the pseudo-close effect, outputting a sound effect such that the plurality of specific images are combined,
When the special effect executing means executes the pseudo closing effect, the operation means image can be vibrated vertically.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images